Home

Yamaha 01V96i Reference Manual

Contents

1. 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears Initial Dota 1 5112 5113 5114 res SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Fix PORT Tx PORT L SYNC TRAHSH I REGUEST 3 Move the cursor to the PORT parameter box in the MACHINE CONTROL section 1 then rotate the Parameter wheel to select the MMC destination The following ports and slot are available as the MMC destination e MIDI MIDI port USB USB port SLOT Slot with MY16 mLAN mLAN card installed If USB is selected move the cursor to the adjacent param eter box on the right and select one of eight ports 4 Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the 01V96i MMC Device ID to the same ID number as the external device MMC commands are effective on devices that use the same Device ID Therefore the MMC Device ID needs to match
2. Insert 1 4 kick Initial Data 5 5112 213 5714 You can now use parameter controls 1 4 and ENTER button to adjust the parameters INSERT ASS 16H EDIT ASS 16H COMPARE BYPASS Off Invi Off In L In 8 8 188 HixR 188 Ee 1 7 Press ENTER to confirm the assignment Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug ins to other insert positions in the channel strip 5 Use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the parameter value you wish to change Most plug ins feature five or more parameters To edit the fifth or subsequent parameters use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the desired parameters and their values in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section The current page num ber and the plug in name appear for a moment immedi ately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons 8 In the same way assign plug ins to other channels 9 When you finish assigning plug ins press the AUX 8 button The button indicator turns off 01V96i Reference Manual 92 Remote Control 6 Move the cursor to a parameter control then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the ENTER button to adjust the value One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter control To turn the p
3. gt wok E ree 32 1 I 05 GMO5 5 VOL amp PAN 07 7 GM CH07 VOL amp PAN por _ 86_ o7_ FaD eND eT en mom mo po 1 1 RMO9 GMO 9 09 VOL amp PAN mom js y pmo fone fom p Ee LEER mom 7 fend vows LL LE E ERR Faber 9 ra eno mom 7 rao TEN ESI ES E E ES mom mom eo 9 w RM15 15 GM CH15 VOL amp PAN mom _ MI ESSE epe Ted ee e des epe d 01 V96i Reference Manual
4. 52220522 B 55 55 95 65 65 65 5555 INSERT INSERT 8 METER INSERT METER 1 ON LEVEL 5 BUS 1 8 ABAND UTPUT DELAY gt 5 ON LEVEL 60 2 BUS to STEREO INSERT ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer COMP Compressor ON On Off e LEVEL OUTPUT DELAY Output delay METER The parameters and sections listed above are identical to those for the Stereo Out For more information refer to the explanation of the Stereo Out Bus to Stereo Bus Out 1 8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus In addition to the ON LEVEL and other parameters you can also set the Send Level On Off Pan and other parameters Tip Youcan also pair adjacent odd even buses for stereo operation see page 33 Bydefault Slot channels 1 8 and 9 16 and OUT chan nels 1 8 are patched to the Bus Out 1 8 outputs However you can change this patching on the Patch Out Patch page see page 44 01V96i Reference Manual sng 30 Bus Outs Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 parameters you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel This section explains how to set the para
5. 88 1071 Sed ON FADE Be on XC FADER ON be 46 eee FADER TEE e 07 eq mee E 01V96i Reference Manual 51511 xipuaddy 132 Appendix Parameter Lists Effects Parameters REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb simulations all with gates pr jen Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb Balance of early reflections and E R BAL 0 10090 reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections M 2 Hz 8 00 kHz em Low pass filter cutoff frequency LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed DECAY Gate closing speed 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 s fs 88 2 kHz 0 01 ms 981 ms fs 96 kHz 2 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 5 fs 96 kHz High pass filter
6. 87 5 5 BJE PARAMETER FADER fi LIBRARY fi 1 16 AUX gt The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters see page 23 01V96i Reference Manual 38 Aux Outs Viewing Faders and On Off Parameters To display the View Fader page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired Aux Out 1 8 then press the DIS PLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F2 button Initial Data geL 112 5113 27114 Hus 1 Rus1 EDIT ON OFF This button turns currently selected Aux 1 8 on or off It links with the corresponding ON 1 8 but ton in the Master layer e Fader This fader sets the currently selected Aux Out 1 8 level It links with the corresponding fader 1 8 in the Master layer The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Control Surface You can use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for Aux Out 1 8 Setting Levels To set Aux Out 1 8 levels press the MASTER button in the LAYER section to select the Master layer then move faders 1 8 At this time you can turn Aux Out 1 8 on
7. aae MACHINE HIDI HOST 7 This page contains following parameters MoM TOR 1 SOLO This parameter turns the Solo function on or off By default it is set to Enabled 2 MODE This parameter determines how the Solo function works There are two options The setting affects only Input Channels e RECORDING In Recording Solo mode soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Solo bus and output via the Monitor out puts Other buses Stereo bus and Bus 1 8 are unaffected by this mode e MIXDOWN In Mixdown Solo mode soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Stereo bus and output via the Monitor outputs Unsoloed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus while the Solo function is enabled Tip Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to mon itor certain Input Channels while recording since the Ste reo bus and Bus 1 8 signals are unaffected Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute unsoloed Input Channels and feed soloed Input Channel signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown 01V96i Reference Manual 50 Monitoring 3 SEL MODE This parameter determines how the Input Channels will be soloed when you press the SOLO button of each Channel There are two options e MIX SOLO In Mix Solo mode any number of channels can be soloed simultaneously e LAST SOLO In
8. gt SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL FEE EE IE ENE 5010 5010 5010 5010 5010 5010 5010 5010 SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO oN ST IN Section USE rgo p 8 M 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 31 32 AUX4 AUX5 AUXT AUXB BUS BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 8085 BUS6 BUS 7 058 AUX AUX2 AUX3 Channel Strip Section p 7 STEREO Section p 8 USER DEFINED KEYS Section p 9 Note For details on the function of each item refer to Control Surface amp Rear Panel in the Owners Manual 01 V96i Reference Manual AD Input Section 1 2 3 oa 69999 INSERT E El E 5 o 23 23 22 16 60 16 60 16 60 16 60 6 l Bonm GAIN GAIN GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK Q PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL 0 1 92 98 o 1 INPUT connectors A B 2 INPUT connectors 13 16 3 INSERT I O connectors 4 PAD switches 5 GAIN controls 6 PEAK indicators 7 SIGNAL indicators AD15 16 selector Monitor Out amp Headphones
9. Immediately before EQ default FADER Immediately before the fader POST FADER Immediately after the fader 2 STEREO LINK This ON OFF button enables you to pair compressors for stereo operation even when channels are not paired 3 CURVE This area displays the current compressor curve 4 TYPE This field indicates the compressor type used by the cur rently selected channels compressor COMP EXPAND COMP H COMP 5 Note You cannot change the Compressor type on this page To change the compressor type recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the compressor library 5 Meters These meters indicate the levels of the post compressor signals and the amount of gain reduction 6 ON OFF The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s compressor on or off 7 PARAMETER section These controls enable you to set the compressor parame ters See page 149 for more information on the parame ters of each compressor type Tip This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels Youcan store the compressor settings in the compressor library which features preset programs that can be used for various applications see page 80 01 V96i Reference Manual Attenuating Input Channels To set the attenuator for each Input Channel press the DIS PLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F3 button to display
10. 92 RECORDING 49 INDIVIDUAL cce 22 iiec 89 Solo function 51 GANG 22 Send levels ER RU 90 Solo safe function 50 PANUDUPOIDS qaasi 22 SO OIG 90 SOLO SCRIP 49 Parameter changes 106 Program changes 100 103 MONO cao t Mr M sr DUS Parameter stesso LI9 PROTEC TPUUON 2520 69 MONO DELAY 132 Parameter wheel 9 MULTI 141 Patch 2 Out page 45 Mate CLOUDS 5a 59 Patch Cascade In page Qcontrol 9 oH 89 Patch Direct Out page 46 Q BO IUe e eet 21 Patch Effect page 64 N Patch IN LIB page 75 R 28 35 Patch IN Name page 28 Nominal Pan preference 109 Patch In 43 Patch Insert In page INGO etus 83 Rear panel eee 10 93 atch Out LIB page 7 AD output section 10 Patch Out Name page 35 D O Patch Out Patch
11. ESHECE PEAKING FEARING SHELF G 4 5 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 400 2 80 kz vro s ESHECE PEAKING PEAKING SHELF 12 200 kz 400 nz ed PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING MS o 63 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING SHELF PF ast 950 40018 12 5 enz ac G sas ood sa 15 14248 zs we PEAKING PEAKING 5 soa 0 2008 4048 Parameter __ FEARING PEAKING PEAKING sow 315 knz 5 30 ss o lol reene PEAKING PEAKING 132 Ke 80 Wr PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 4 5 dB 2 0 dB 140 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 60 kHz 45 063 PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 15 dB Title 14 Piano 2 EX G Crunch 1 2 5 dB 1 5 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 125 Hz 450 Hz 3 35 kHz 19 0 kHz E G G Crunch 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 04 0 16 PEAKING 0 0 dB 355 Hz 12 5 kHz PEAKING L SHELF G 6 0dB 8 5dB 4 5dB 4 0 dB 315 Hz 1 06 kHz 4 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 1 1 1 E G Dist 2 E
12. F7 FO 43 3n 3E lA 04 ee pp F7 Setup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01 961 Setup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Backup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96i Backup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Backup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96i Backup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive 2 8 3 10 Parameter change Function call Library store recall Reception When this is received the specified memory library will be stored recalled If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be ex ecuted and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Re sponse Transmission If Parameter change Tx is ON and you store or recall a memory library for which Program Change transmission is not valid this message will be transmit ted with the Device Number set t
13. 104 MIDI Asgn page 103 MIDI Setup page 102 MIDDDUOD IRI 8 MIDI IN THRU OUT ports 10 MIDI machine control 100 01 V96i Reference Manual Index 117 MIDI 94 Pair Grup Out EQ page 62 PHONES Jack 7 49 BANKS eR GNE 94 Pair Grup Fader page 59 PHONES LEVEL control 7 97 Pair Grup Out Mute page 60 PLUG IN 107 LEARN Dutton 96 X Pair Grup Output page Boe PIU casto eoo tout 90 MIDI messages ceo edes 96 26 33 POWER ON OFF switch 11 TARGET parameter 95 HORIZON TAL 277 osuere 11 LUISA LIT iid oie 97 Using the display 27 page 109 MIDI Warning preference 109 Using the SEL buttons 27 Prefera 110 MIDI USB Section 10 27 109 MEX 50 ee etn 9 ete oe treten 83 89 MIXDOWN 49 Bus To St page 31 Automation 93 98 100
14. 7 to INPUI7 9 to NOASIGN 26 NOASSIGN SS 27 NOASSIGN NN NOASSIGN ooo so NOASSIGN 31 NOANGN 32 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN ss NOASSIGN Initial Parameter to Control Change Table mon ma iw NOASSIGN NOASSIGN G NOASSIGN 6 NOASSIGN 1 SS EQ FlOMID ne INPUIS era romo _ 7i to FlOMID m 78 INPUTIS meuz 8 t n NOASSIGN 01V96i Reference Manual 161 xipueddy 162 Appendix MIDI CHANNEL6 mon ma w LO NOWSICN 6 tQ GlOMIDH 7 INPUTS 3 tQ 9 tQ SENI o o M NOASSIGN 15 NOASIN 16 NOMSEN 3 38 NOASIN NOANIN 20 NOASSIGN 1 32 O 33 NOASSIGN
15. 57 nossen U S 01 V96i Reference Manual mon ma tow 59 possen NOMSEN nossen SS e FHiH NPUIZ __ e a 76 NOWSEN 7 78 NOWSEN 779 nossen nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 6 nossen 8 nossen 8 NOMSEN 1 79 mos 90 to OHicH 6 S NO ASSIGN riz 11 High o ope jQ ATH NPUT 7 to ATH m 5 to ATH INPUTS 9 to ATH mm 75 NOASSIGN 26 NOASSIGN 27 NOASSIGN NN NOA
16. 7 e f ommon 9 Q common M NOASSIGN 15 NOASIN 16 NOMSEN 3 38 NOASIN NOANIN 20 NOASSIGN 1 32 O 33 NOASSIGN 3 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN 26 NOASSIGN 27 NN 39 NOASSIGN 1 Noassicn 31 NowSIN 45 nossen 46 a nossen 48 nossen 49 nossen 30 NOASIN S2 NOMSEN nossen 4 nossen 55 nossen 56 nossen 57 nossen U S 01 V96i Reference Manual mon ma tow 1 NOASSIGN NOASIN y 62 NOASSIGN 6 NOASSIGN 66 EQ INPUTZ 66 tQ FH MID INPUTZS 6 a FH MD 30 76 nossen o 77 NOMSGN 78 NOASIGN
17. Jd u 40 4 12 15 14 za z1 zc zd E Gm Bi ALL STEREO One Ge aa Se Glace EE aa aa BIG BG EC zo zo zug 341 1 gana gg HA 89 29 29 Sle BE Bier er Ber n AE BE BEE BE EE de 28 BO Bo E SLRR OLHND MODE 1 PAN buttons These buttons determine whether the channels Pan set ting is applied to the Bus outs In surround mode they also determine whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs 2 Bus buttons 1 8 These buttons route the currently selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs If the 01V96i is in Surround mode the button indicators change as follows depending on the selected Surround mode 12 5 6 7 8 Surround moder 3T Surround mode 5 1 lt Surround mode 61 t R E 8 L Left R Right C Center S Surround Ls Left Sur round Rs Right Surround E Low Frequency Effect Bs Back Surround The above table shows the default assignment The actual assignment may vary depending on the settings on the DIO Setup Surround
18. n MIDI messages 96 COMM Link preference 109 DIO Warning preference Program changes 103 Cascading 1 111 DlO Setup Cascade page 112 Remote Layer 83 Cascade eanit s USER DEFINED KEYS 87 SYNC parameter 112 DIO Setup Insert page 85 Attenuator 20 30 36 CATEGORY 14 DIO Setup Machine i Output signals 34 1 4 ON OFF switch 10 DIO Setup Meter page Be Auto Channel Select preference 109 CH5 8 ON OFF switch 10 DIO Setup MIDI Host page Auto Direct Out On preference 2 109 CH9 12 ON OFF switch oe 84 98 101 112 Auto EQUALIZER Display preference Channel Copy Parameter preference DIO Setup Monitor page 49 PERENNE 109 e 19 DIO Setup Output Att page 34 AUTO 135 Channelfaders 7 DlO Setup Preferl page 109 Auto PAN Display preference 109 Channel ID Channel preference 110 DlIO Setup Prefer2 page 109 Auto SOLO Display preference 109 Change tete 75 DIO Setup Remote page 85 95 110 Auto update function 70 Channel strip
19. xipuaddy 122 Appendix Parameter Lists INSERT IN Port ID Port ID 505 EE SL 10 SL 10 SL 11 SL 11 51 12 51 12 51 13 51 13 SL 14 SL 14 SL 15 SL 15 SL 16 SL 16 USBI USBI USB2 USB2 USB3 USB3 USB4 USB4 0585 0585 0586 0586 Description Port ID Port ID Slot 5 IN INS CH21 A Slot CH6 IN INS CH22 Slot CH7 IN INS CH23 Slot CH8 IN INS CH24 Slot CH9 IN INS CH25 A Slot CH10 IN INS CH26 AD10 Slot CH11 IN INS CH27 AD11 Slot CH12 IN INS CH28 AD12 Slot CH13 IN INS CH29 AD13 Slot CH14 IN INS CH30 AD14 Slot CH15 IN INS CH31 AD15 Slot CH16 IN INS CH32 AD16 USB CH1 IN INS BUS1 2TD L USB CH2 IN INS BUS2 2TD R USB CH3 IN INS BUS3 USB IN INS 8054 USB CH5 IN INS 8055 USB CH6 IN INS BUS6 USB7 USB7 USB CH7 IN INS BUS7 USB8 USB8 USB CH8 IN INS BUS8 OV D5 AD6 AD7 AD8 09 NO 01V96i Reference Manual Initial Input Patch Settings 123 Initial Input Patch Settings CHANNEL EFFECT IN PATCH CASCADE IN PATCH EFFECT TYPE EFFECT 1 REVERB HALL EFFECT 2 REVERB ROOM EFFECT3 REVERB STAGE EFFECT4 REVERB PLATE mono input 01V96i Reference Manual 5357 xipuaddy 124 Appendix Parameter Lists CHANNEL NAME 01V96i Reference Manual Output Patch Parameters 125 Output Patch Parameters SLOT ADAT OMNI 2TR OUT Digital p ow ww
20. COMP 44 gt 2 Press the or down 7 cursor button to select a link to which you want add chan nels Ty 1234 180 11 12 15 14 1E 15 1 O b Coe Wie 13 2122 05 24 2626 2728 oe 2 od a camo ium sumo mam o iua waa num cma cum 3 Press the SEL button for a channel you wish to add to the EQ or Compressor link The selected channel is marked with ig and the chan nel is added to the link Example Input Channels 1 4 7 8 12 and 14 have been added to EQ link b 1z 24 amp 158 11 12 15 14 15 16 12 m cum mam o cua um nan imm cum mam caa em b 1 15 13 Ae 20004 Hwee Tod m aum aaa m Ifyou add one channel from a pair to a link the pair part ner is automatically added to the link Youcanalso select a channel on another layer by switching layers In the same way press the SEL button for other channels you wish to add to the link The EQ or compressor settings for the first channel added to the link are applied to a
21. the level to change by 6 dB 160 points ge OUT dB 0 0 to 18 0 180 points This sets the expander s output signal level This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold For higher knee settings expansion is mene t applied gradually as the signal falls below the speci fied threshold creating a more natural sound I O Characteristics Time Series Analysis RATIOzoc 1 KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB Input Signal Output Signal g 9 g 9 THRESHOLD 9 ATTACK RELEASE mE 2 a 2 5 5 i E 2 THRESHOLD 4 RATIO Input Level Time Time 01V96i Reference Manual Dynamics Parameters 155 COMPANDER HARD H COMPANDER SOFT S The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor expander and limiter Output Level 1 1 dq THRESHOLD Input Level WIDTH The companders function differently at the following levels 1 0 dB and higher sse Functions as a limiter 2 Exceeding threshold Functions as a compressor 3 Below the threshold and width Functions as an expander The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5 1 while the soft compander has an expan sion ratio of 1 5 1 The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2 The
22. 777 ee 8 0 CE FADER se ive Ee 0 2 ON ecc en Eee w e spend e ee eE eps FADER IBE ES EERIETENENEIEXEZESXENESENESER FADER 01V96i Reference Manual 51511 xipuaddy 130 Appendix Parameter Lists Bank 3 XG Vol amp Pan Controlle Long iH 9 3 et 112 34 END ae END _ Fo 10 fac spes Fo 10 ac ceri eden Fo 43 10 jac END en ete 20 e ee Faber 10 43 10 jac 08 C Faber FO 43 fio jc 08 os mpg DES
23. 138 SOLO TRIM 50 USB 100 REVERB HALE 132 SOLO buttons 7 8 USB OUT 45 REVERB PLATE 132 SOLO indicator 9 User assignable layer 110 REVERB 132 SOLO 9 USER DEFINED KEYS 9 REVERB STAGE esie etn 132 SRC sections Tene UAR 14 Initial assignments 121 REVERSE 132 8 Utility Battery page 113 REV canes 44 IN SeCHODLama eum 8 Utility CH Status page 14 RING MOD 136 STEREO DELAY 133 UTILITY button ss 8 E 136 STEREO 8 2 9 V Routing ST Pair Link preference Stereo OU 29 Variable 22222 2 2 20 39 41 W AL 24 5 s 30 View Fader page 24 32 38 Sampling rates n dee 14 Delaying 30 View Library page 75 DOUBLE CHANNEL 16 EQ ing 31 View Parameter PARE sue 23 31 37 DOUBLE 16 and Balancing 33 VIEW 8 Setting higher
24. NN 39 NOASSIGN 1 Noassicn 31 NOwSIN 49 nossen 30 NOASSIGN Si nossen S2 Noassicn nossen 4 NOASSIGN ss nossen 56 nossen 57 nossen U S 01 V96i Reference Manual mon ma tow 59 NOASSIGN Pei NoassiGN G NOASSIGN 6 NOASSIGN 66 SURROUND WIDTH INPUTZ ___ 68 SURROUND WIDTH 69 SURROUND WIDTH INPUTSO NOASIN 8 8 NOASSIGN 8 NOASIN NOASSIGN 8 NOASSIGN 86 NOASIN o 8 NOASSIGN 88 NOASIN 1 89 SURROUND DEPTH 90 SURROUND DEPTH INPUTZ6 ooo o o NOASSIGN H3 NOASIN oo o o o NOASSIGN oo o o 116 J SS 17 NoassiN NOASSIGN J J MIDI Data Format 1 DATA FORMAT 1 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE Command rx tx function 8n NOTE OFF rx Control the internal
25. ReceiveFrom sendTo 4 Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter H box the right then rotate the Parameter wheel to specify the port ID 24 n be SPECIAL FUNCT LOWS Studio Maa DAH REMOTE m um m um qum pum LI Tip To control Pro Tools remotely you need one port for Note If you select an incorrect port you will be unable to use every eight audio channels the Remote function Be sure to match the port ID with that specified in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools 9 When you finish setting the parameters close the window 5 01V96i Reference Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 85 5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears DIO SETUP Initial Data geL 112 STI3 5 14 CH1 CH1 CO EDIT Em EE TIME CODE FEET meets DOO 11000 e HSERT 6551 ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT Press a channel strip s IHSEHT switch ito assignZedit an insert MIDI AOSI fi MONITOR REMOTE M MACHINE 6 Select ProTools as the target device for the Target parameter 1 located in the upper right corner of the page By default the Remote layer target is set to ProTools If another target has been selected rotate the Parameter wheel to select ProTools Z Press the LAYER REMOTE button
26. 109 PHANTOM 48 10 E ME s PAIR GROUP button 8 Phantom Power 12 Pair Grup In Comp Pages ete cooks 63 1 4 ON OFF switch 10 INET GG 83 Pair Grup In EQ page 62 CH5 8 ON OFF switch 10 Pro TOO 83 In Fader DASE 59 CH9 12 ON OFF switch 10 REMOTE 83 Pair Grup In Mute page ERU C mm 18 MD Pair Grup Input page 27 PAGER 135 is Pair Grup Out Comp page 63 TRANSPORT section 99 01 V96i Reference Manual 118 Index REMOTE button 8 83 SCOT Section noe tec ette etude 11 T Remote Layer D 49 Nuendo Cubase 93 LAST SOEO x 50 2 e Pro tools 83 50 RESET BOTH 27 MIX SOLO EEEREN REVECHORU one 137 MIXDOWN y enm 49 22 REV FLANGE 137 RECORDING REV4SYMPHO 138 49 U REV gt CHORUS 137 Solo function 51 REV gt ELANGE entitas 138 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL 50 eene 97 REVS PAN hc 138 Solo safe function 50 USB 10 gt 5
27. 151 156 Scene Memory to Program Change Table 156 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 157 MEDE DEFO AT tn 173 MIDI Implementation Chart End of Manual 01 V96i Reference Manual Contents of the Owner s Manual Booklet 3 Contents of the Owner s Manual Booklet The contents of the separate Owner s Manual booklet are as follows PRECAUTIONS Welcome Package Contents About the included discs About the included DAW software About the utility software Firmware updates About this Owner s Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Control Surface amp Rear Panel Control Surface Rear Panel Installing an Optional Card Operating Basics About the Display Selecting Display Pages Display Interface Selecting Layers Selecting Channels Selecting Fader Modes Metering Connections and Setup Connections Wordclock Connections and Settings Input and Output Patching Tutorial Input and Output Patching Setting the Input Levels Pairing Channels Setting the Routing the Input Signals Using the EQ Library Compressing the Input Signals Using the Internal Effects Recording to DAW Software via the USB Port Adjusting the Monitor Levels from the DAW Using Scene Memories Changing the Channel Names Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assigna
28. CS MONO DEAT Smpemensddgy 222222 79 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simplestereo dey e Modulation based Effects PresetName wee 15 Pi ec SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modu lation than normal chorus PHASER 16 stage stereo phase shifter TREMOLO TREMOLO Tremolo HQ Pitch HQ PITCH a TRI TT shifter producing stable results Available for internal effects 1 Guitar Effects PresetName O OO Dynamic Effects Preset Name 5 ito Dyna Filter DYNA FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Dyna Flange DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Dyna Phaser DYNA PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter 01 V96i Reference Manual Soeur 78 Libraries e Combination Effects PresetName Distortion and delay in series e Others PresetName npe Description O Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3 band parallel filter 24 dB octave FREEZE Simple sampler Available for internal effects 1 and 2 ST REVERB Stereo reverb M Band Dyna M BAND DYNA _ 3 band dynamics processor e Add On Effects PresetName we Description 45 276 COMP276 This emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a standard in recording studios Comp276S COMP276S This is a stereo model of Comp276 47 Co
29. i RecalNOXK Pa REL Ce 2 Recal 1 6 Recall NOXK 50 Output MUTE Group Enable W Out Mute Group w __ 66 Output Fader Group assign x Outfader Assign x Output Group Assign x OwtQAwgnk 59 Output COMP Group assign x Out COMP Assign x 75 FADER SOLO RELEASE Mode FaderSolo RELEASE On Off Channel pate charnel Paste REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK 7 RMT UDEF BANKI REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK T USR LAYER BANKAI 90 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK 1_ USRLAYER BANKI 98 Machine PLAY _____ 99 _____ 01 V96i Reference Manual 51511 xipuaddy 120 Appendix Parameter Lists Patch Editor DAW AUTO STATUS DAW AUTO STATUS 163 DAW MONITOR STATUS DAW MONI STATUS 01V96i Reference Manual USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments 121 NET DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments Group Machine Program Special IN Fader Machine ER Scene 1 Recall UDEF BANK D UDEF BANK C SHUTTLE MIDI PGM 1 Display Back IN Mute DAW WIN DAW Machine Display 2 3 scene3 Recall paw BaNK AUTO RTZ MIDI POM 3 c l No Assign Group B READ Copy ue me um pnm m Input Patch Parameters INPUT INSERT IN EFFECT IN CASCADE ___ 01V96i Reference Manual 5151
30. nossen 4 NOASSIGN ss nossen 56 nossen 57 nossen U S 01 V96i Reference Manual mon ma tow NOMSEN 8 66 EQ HPFON NPUIZ 68 tQ 9 6 EQ INPUISD 76 NOWSEN 7 78 NOWSEN 779 nossen nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 6 nossen 8 nossen 8 NOMSEN 9 tq oN 5 o NPUIZ NO ASSIGN riz 3 NO ASIN 1 76 SURROUND LFEH 8 SURROUND 79 SURRO
31. xipueddy 184 Appendix MIDI 2 8 3 21 Parameter request Sort Table When the 01 961 receives this data it will transmit Sort Table Data CH at intervals of 50 msec as a rule although this may not be the case if the port is being used by other communication for a period of 10 seconds If Address UL 0x7F is received transmission of all meter data will be halted immediately disable Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0OO011nnnn 3n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00011010 1A OlV96i ADDRESS 00010011 13 Library sort table 0000 Of Library type EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 22 Parameter change Key remote Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the same processing that is executed when the key spec ified by Address is pressed released Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 11 n20 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID
32. 56 Becallsatefatetiofi on 72 ntc M oM ete N 56 e DEN 68 ona edet Ms 54 Shadow 70 o ete o the 56 Sorting 72 56 Storing amp Recalling 69 56 Using he Scone Memory Page 2 69 PAN SURR LINK 53 cee 68 Pani 56 Scene memory 00 68 PATTERN 56 Scene memory Ud 68 Setting up and Selecting 53 SCENE MEMORY section 9 ST LINK 56 Scene 68 SURROUND 23 53 Scene up down buttons 9 Trajectory patterns 56 SEL buttons 7 8 SURROUND MODE 53 SELECTED CHANNEL section 9 Surround modes 525 53 Setting UU 38 Factory default 52 Shadow memory SYMPHONIC stes eren detis 134 RS tome 7 12 SINC parameter 112 SINGLE 16 System exclusive Messages 100 11 13 100 113 01V96i Reference Manual USER DEFINED KEYS 119 Appendix Parameter Lists USER DEFINED KEYS Nexus 6
33. se NOASSIGN Initial Parameter to Control Change Table mon ma iw NOASSIGN NOASSIGN 2 NOASSIGN 6 NOASSIGN 66 mow epe 7i to ne INPUTIS _ 8 t n 01V96i Reference Manual 159 xipueddy 160 Appendix MIDI CHANNEL4 NO ASSICN NPUZS 2 tQ NPUIZ 6 tQ 8 tQ INPUTS of __ o 7 nossen 1 nossen 1 nossen nossen 1 29 3 2 nossen 3 nossen 3 nossen 33 nossen 726 nossen 27 NN NOASSIGN 39 NOASSIGN 1 Noassicn 31 NowSIN 45 46 nossen a nossen 48 nossen 49 nossen 30 NOA
34. 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer This parametric EQ features four bands HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID and LOW COMP Compressor This dynamics processor can be used as compressor expander or limiter The processor can be located pre EQ pre STEREO fader or post STEREO fader ON On Off This button turns the Stereo Out on or off e LEVEL The STEREO fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels Balance This section enables you to adjust the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out OUTPUT DELAY Output delay This section delays the output signals It is mainly used to fine tune the signal timing e METER This section enables you to switch the metering position of signal levels that are displayed on the Meter page or by the stereo meter to the right of the screen For more information on selecting the metering position refer to Viewing the Level Meters in the Owner s Man ual booklet Note You can also patch the Stereo Out signals to other output connectors or the I O card by using the Patch Out Patch pages Bus Out 1 8 The Bus Out 1 8 section mixes signals routed from Input Channels to the specified buses processes them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the spec ified output connectors or I O card The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal flow Gain Reduction Meter METER METER 0
35. 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTE EN to determine DELAY H3 FR h d 4 3 d 5 Max value depends on tempo setting Low pass filter cutoff frequency THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz 01 V96i Reference Manual Effects Parameters 133 STEREO DELAY DELAY LCR Two input two output basic stereo delay One input two output 3 tap delay left center right DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time Left channel feedback plus val 99 to 99 ues for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Right channel feedback plus val E ues for normal phase feedback 79194521 minus values for reverse phase feedback Feedback gain plus values for FB _ 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 2 8 00 kHz 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU LN 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTET ES to determine
36. Program Initial User Change Scene Scene 87 eo N 0 O Un 3431 3383 3 A 3 QO No No No No N UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ NOP MTN TNT NTR CORN DA HY BR N N N Un UJ UJ UJ UJ gt UJ UJ UJ N UJ E 2 __22__ VENE 2 ___ NENNEN mande 32 _ 3 NEN 35 __36__ Pp 37 _____ 38 NN UJ UJ 01V96i Reference Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table Initial Parameter to Control Change Table CHANNELT 1 RADERH CHANNEL WNPUTI 2 TADERH CHANNEL INPUTZ 6 TADERH CHANNEL __ TADERH CHANNEL INPUTS 79 FADERH CHANNEL INPUIS NOASSIGN 26 NOASSIGN o 27 NOASSIGN 78 NOASSIGN 29 NOASSIGN 2 NOASSIGN assign 59 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN NOASSIGN eo urs 68 ON CHANNEL INPUIS ON CHANNEL ON CHANNEL NFUTI7 8i ON CHANNEL INPUTIB 86 oN CHANNEL INP
37. 135 01V96i Reference Manual 116 Index DYNA BIE IB st 136 DYNA FLANGE 55 estende 136 DYNA PHASER 137 Dynamics Comp Edit page 20 30 37 Dynamics Comp Lib page 79 Dynamics Gate Edit page 19 Dynamics Gate Lib page 79 DYNAMICS button 8 E EARLY REP eius Siete 132 PECHO 134 Effect FX1 Edit page 66 Effect PX Lib page un ene 76 Effect FX2 Edit page 66 Effect FX2 Lib page 76 Effect FX3 Edit page 66 Effect EX9 Lib page 76 Effect FX4 Edit page 66 Effect FX4 Lib page 76 Effect P In Edit page 67 teet 8 Effects 66 Internal 64 parameter tables 132 PIG AAS aie ot 67 Effects brary one ooo 76 Preset s dn 77 POYAS Matos M D 77 EMPHASIS 355 cepi 14 9 IC rrr 21 31 33 37 38 21 E 21 ed E 21 EQ EQ Edit page 215
38. 2 E 17 2 EE Ed Ral 2 20 2 21 PF 3 2 E 2 26 2 28 2 ao PEAKING H SHELF 45dB Stroke 1 0 4 5 0 4 4 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 1 0dB 4 0 dB 106 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 30 kHz 4 5 7 2 5 0 2 0 dB 3 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB Stroke 2 L SHELF H SHELF 00 Hz 750 Hz 2 00 kHz 3 55 kHz 1 L SHELF PEAKING 0 5 dB 2 0 dB N N gt 4 Arpeg 1 224 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 6 70 kHz L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 0 5 5 dB 0 0 4 0 180 Hz 355 Hz 4 00 kHz 4 25 kHz 7 45 1 PEAKING PEAKING 1 048 1 5 dB N UJ gt 2 2 0 dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0 dB 90 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz 2 0 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 5 dB 190 Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Brass Sec gt N Male Vocal G 1 N G 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 170 Hz 6 70 kHz PEAKING Male Vocal 0 4 5 5 5 5 7 2 6 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 0 dB 2 0 dB 118 Hz 6 00 kHz G 27 Female Vo 1 01V96i Reference Manual 5357 xipuaddy 148 Append
39. 3 Rotate the level control of the desired chan nel to set the level You can always view the 27112 STIS 2714 current channel level at the m m e top of the display XE 4 Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN con trol to adjust the pan setting The pan setting can be applied to PAHZ ROUTE either ST IN channel L or R To switch between channels L for pan setting pressthesame ziii SEL button repeatedly The channel currently being controlled is indicated in the upper left corner of the display Input Channels 1 Press the SEL button or move the fader for the channel you wish to control 2 To control EQ for the currently selected chan nel press one of the following buttons to select the band you wish to adjust HIGH button HIGH band H MID button HIGH MID band L MID button LOW MID band LOW button LOW band 3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL O FRE and GAIN controls to adjust the Q frequency and gain of the band selected in Step 2 When the Auto EQUALIZER Display page 109 check box is on the 01V96i displays the EQ EQ Edit page 501 502 113 2114 BUST BUST a a O O 28051 EQUALIZER EDIT 01V96i Reference Manual sjauuey gt andu 26 Input Channels If the check box is off the parameter value currently p al ri n g n p ut 5 be
40. Ema Settings on the 01V96i and the Edit indicator remains off Display The parameters of recalled 02 My scene Scene memory 2 were edited Sri sra Therefore the Edit indicators appear indicating that the cur rent settings on the 01V96i do not match Scene memory 2 Edit indicator 01 V96i Reference Manual Storing and Recalling Scenes 69 Storing and Recalling Scenes You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the top panel or using the dedicated Scene memory page on the display Note e When you store Scenes make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store Make sure that no settings especially faders have been adjusted unintentionally If you are not sure of the Edit Buffers contents recall the last Scene make the adjustments you want then store the Scene You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene memory just in case Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the SCENE MEMORY Buttons You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall Scenes 1 Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96i to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene 2 Press the SCENE MEMORY Up or Down V buttons to select a Scene memory ber If you select a Scene memory other than the cur rently recalled Scene its number flashes at the to of the display Scene memories 0 Ud and 0 00 are special read
41. LEARN When you turn on this button MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes DATA parameter boxes These boxes display the type of MIDI messages in hexa decimal or alphabets assigned to the ON button 6 FADER section This section displays the type of MIDI messages in hexa decimal or alphabet assigned to the faders for the cur rently selected channels 01 16 6 Move the cursor to the desired bank button BANK parameter buttons 1 4 then press ENTER Z Press the LAYER REMOTE button to select Remote layer You can now use the MIDI Remote function 8 Use the faders and ON buttons to control the MIDI device 01 V96i Reference Manual OJ3u05 96 Remote Control Assigning MIDI Messages to Channel Controls You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the factory presets in the banks However you can also assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders or ON buttons This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the channel controls using the example of assigning Hold On Off messages Control Change 64 Values 127 amp 0 to the Channel 1 ON button 1 MIDI OUT Connect the 01V96i s MIDI IN port to the MIDI OUT port of a MIDI keyboard to which a Hold On Off controllable foot switch is con nected Enable the MIDI Remote function on the 01V96i MIDI OUT OOOOOO MIDI keyboar
42. The Remote Layer is now available for control enabling you to remotely control Pro Tools dg lata ae 3112 STIS 2114 0 perd CODE FEET m ears OOO 1000 Press channel strip s IHSERT switch ito assionfedit an insert Note When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected the 01 9615 top panel faders and other channel buttons are available for remote control To control the 01V96i you need to select an Input Channel Layer or the Master Layer Display While the Pro Tools layer is selected you can use the F2 F4 buttons as well as the left and right B Tab Scroll buttons to select display modes You can select the fol lowing display modes using these buttons Insert Display mode F2 button Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode In this mode you can assign and edit plug ins ata QO initial Gm m em ecc EDIT 6 1 MaRe Froo FroTools SELECT ASSIGH O TIME Pan FEET ears OOO 11000 Press channel strie s INSERT switch ito assign edit an insert EHTEF 1 This parameter enables you to select remote control target device 2 COUNTER This counter indicates the current position This counter works in unison with the timecode counter on Pro Tools The display format
43. to each other GLOBAL PRE POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels simultaneously including those not displayed on the current page to pre fader or post fader When you switch to Variable mode the signal source points are set to post fader PRE POST buttons are set to POST and Send level rotary controls are reset to 01V96i Reference Manual 40 Aux Outs Note Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends patched to the effects processor on the effects return channels Forexample by default Aux 1 is routed to the input of the internal Effects processor 1 and L and R of ST IN Channel 1 are patched to the processors output Under these con ditions if you raise the level of the send signals from ST IN Channel 1 to Aux 1 the signals are returned to ST IN Channel 1 creating a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1 8 includ ing setting levels and Pre Post parameters This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux Send settings or simultaneously adjust the levels of certain channels routed to Aux 1 8 1 Press one of the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears View1 16 page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1 16 View17 STI page This page dis
44. usus em mer P E SS ee DAH L sv ne TRANSH REGLIEST Parameters for cascade link page 111 will be copied to the other 01V96i via the REMOTE connector If you select the REQUEST button instead of the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter you can reverse the copy direction At this point Bus 1 8 Aux 1 4 and the Stereo Bus on both 01V96is are integrated and the data is output via Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 4 and the Stereo Out on the master unit If you solo channels on one of the 01V96is you can monitor the soloed signals via the Monitor out puts 01 V96i Reference Manual Checking the Battery and System Version 113 Checking the Battery and the System Version The Utility Battery page enables you to check the condition of the internal memory backup battery and the system ver sion number To locate this page press the DISPLAY ACCESS UTILITY button repeatedly UTILITY initial Data 5112 5113 5114 man creme 0 G J Status Okay Yes Fire Wer 2 Eos OSC LLATORA CH STATUS BATTERY DEF IS 1 Status If the Status is Okay the battery has sufficient voltage for operation If the Status is Voltage Low ask your Yamaha dealer or authorized Yamaha service center to replace the battery as soon as possible Failure to replace a low battery may result in data loss Note
45. 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time m em spade UM THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz 50 0 2 16 0 kHz 300 Reverb panned reverb REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all panned reverb 100 all reverb m C eater L lt gt R L R L R 2 H de d 4 d d 5 High pass filter cutoff frequency Low pass filter cutoff frequency 01 V96i Reference Manual Effects Parameters 139 DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel Feedback gain plus values for FB 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflections bal ance 096 all delay 10096 all early reflections DLY ER 0 100906 S Hall L Hall Ran TYPE dom Revers Plate Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay character istics 0 dead 10 live wg __ sd 1 149 Number of early reflections Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTE L 1 to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER 1 to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTETO to determine FB DLY 1 h ddd
46. 2 Press the corresponding SEL button to select the channel that was assigned the plug in you want to edit 3 In the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section move the cursor to the parameter control Insert 1 4 that was assigned the parameter you want to edit Note To adjust a plug in assigned to insert 5 press the Tab Scroll button to change the parameter indication in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section then select a parameter con trol 6 Move the cursor to one of the four parameter controls then rotate the Parameter wheel to select a plug in By default the parameter controls enable you to select plug ins to be assigned to channel inserts 1 4 To assign a plug in to insert 5 press the Tab Scroll button to change the indication in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section If you are using the TDM system you can also assign out board effects processors INSERT H23laH EDIT 55 BYPASS HSERT OFF InvR Off In B B In 8 8 188 HixR 188 1 4 Press ENTER to display the parameters In the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section the PARAM but ton is automatically selected and the Information box indicates the selected plug in parameters CODE FEET sss OOO 11000 UA COMPARE BYPASS I HSERT
47. E EM Faber FO 43 fio jc ps Eg I EIESEIEZEXESENESENETESENENESES Faber FO 43 10 c 08 00 7 feno Faber FO 43 10 c 08 jo 7 feno e Faber Fo 43 0 jac jos jor jos 7 gt 1 1 VOL amp PAN gt gt m 2 2 J M02 XG02 XG CH02 VOL amp PAN gt m 2 gt 2 XG03 VOL amp PAN gt gt gt m 2 m RMO4 4 XG CHO4 VOL amp PAN gt m 2 A m m gt gt m m m m m m m m m m 05 5 XG CHO5 VOL amp PAN EN gt m 2 06 06 06 VOL amp PAN gt m 2 EN gt O O gt rm M07 7 7 VOL amp PAN gt gt gt m 2 m RMO8 8 8 VOL amp PAN gt m 2 A 09 9 9 5 gt m 2 gt lt gt m N gt UJ No m m m
48. Left channel modulation and 0 00 354 38 right channel modulation phase degrees difference FF PP ded ded d DISTORTION One input two output distortion effect DST1 DST2 DST TYPE OVD1 OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distor tion OVD overdrive AMP SIMULATE One input two output guitar amp simulator Parameter Description AMP TYPE Guitar amp simulation type DST1 DST2 5 OVD1 OVD2 Distortion type DST distor tion OVD overdrive CRUNCH MIDDLE 0 100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0 100 High tone control CAB DEP 0 100 Speaker cabinet simulation depth tar 100 800 Kz Parametric equalizer Frequency 100 010 Parametric equalizer bandwidth _ 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT DYNA FILTER Two input two output dynamically controlled filter Control source input signal or SOURCE MIDI Note On NE SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity ra UP DOWN Upward or downward fre quency change DECAY MN Filter frequency change decay speed 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 5 fs 48 kHz ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz DYNA FLANGE Two input two output dynamically controlled flanger 2 Feedback gain plus values FB GAIN _99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back
49. system set tings TABLE This button selects MIDI Asgn page settings e CTL TABLE This button selects the MIDI Ctl Asgn page settings e PLUG IN This button selects the settings of an optional card installed in the slot Note Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes MIDI transmission and reception port settings and message settings After you store to an external device bulk dump data that has its reception disabled if the 01V96i later starts to receive this particular data 017 961 bulk dump reception will be turned off immediately and the 01V96i will be unable to receive subsequent data Therefore before you store the data selected by the SETUPMEM button using Bulk Dump be sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception 01 V96i Reference Manual ICHIA 108 5 If necessary move cursor to ter box next to the selected button then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desired bulk dump data Tip If you selected ALL in the parameter box all data selected by the corresponding button is transmitted as bulk dump data gt To start transmitting bulk data move the cur sor to the TRANSMIT button then press ENTER Bulk Dump is executed During the operation the Bulk Dump window appears indicating the current bulk dump status To abort the bulk dump operation move the cursor to the CANC
50. 100 He 8 00 kHz EQ peaking ype frequency 10000 EQ peaking type bandwidth 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz 01 V96i Reference Manual Effects Parameters 137 DYNA PHASER Two input two output dynamically controlled phaser Control source input signal or MIDI Note On velocity rag UP DOWN Upward or downward fre quency change OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus 5 values for reverse phase feed back STAGE Number of phase shift stages 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 5 fs 96 kHz REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel ow THRU LN 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and chorus balance 096 all reverb 100 all chorus FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 10090 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 10090 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE to determine FREQ 1 FAP B UIS De d ded d REV gt CHORUS One in
51. 256 AUX1 263 AUX8 512 5 Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data Effect is O Effect 1 3 Effect 4 If the store destination is 16383 Ox3FFF this indicates that the li brary data has been changed by a external cause such as bulk re ception only transmitted by the 01V96i 2 Varies with the firmware version 2 8 3 11 Parameter change Function call title Reception When this is received the title of the specified memory library will be changed If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be executed and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter re sponse Transmission In response to a request this is transmitted with the device number set to the Tx CH When the title is changed on the 01 961 this message will be transmitted with the device number set to Tx CH ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call 0100 title Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 13 Parameter change Function call Scene Library Clear Reception When this is received the specified memory library will be cleared If this is re ceived from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be executed and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response Transmission When memory or library is cleared on the 01V96i this message will be trans
52. 3 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN 26 NOASSIGN 27 NN 39 nossen Noassicn 31 NOwSIN 45 nossen 46 nossen a nossen 48 nossen 49 nossen 30 NOASIN S2 NOMSEN nossen 4 nossen 55 nossen 56 nossen 57 nossen U S 01 V96i Reference Manual mon ma w 1 NOASSIGN NOASIN SS 62 NOASSIGN 6 NOASSIGN SS 66 EQ 76 EQ era romo 7i to omb m 76 nossen 77 78 NOASIGN 79 NOASSIGN s NOASSIGN 8 NoassiN 8 NOASSIGN 8 NOASIN NOASSIGN 8 NOASSIGN 86 NOASIN o 8 NOASSIGN 88 NOASIN 8 t oomo NPUIZS NOASSIGN
53. 79 NOASSIGN s NOASSIGN 8 NoassiN 8 NOASSIGN 8 NOASIN NOASSIGN 8 NOASSIGN 86 NOASIN o 8 NOASSIGN 88 NOASIN tQ WPUIZS 90 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN oo 9 NOASSIGN J J NOASSIGN o o H6 NOASIN 117 NOASSIGN J J NOXASIGN mm 2 Q GHIGHH meu 6 INPUTS 5 eq mru 9 to NOASSIGN o 26 NOASSIGN Sid SS 27 NOASSIGN NN NOASSIGN ooo so NOASSIGN Psi NOANGN 32 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN ss NOASSIGN Initial Parameter to Control Change Table mon ma iw NOASSIGN NOASSIGN ooo o G NOASSIGN
54. Compressor Link Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be linked There are four compressor links for Input Chan nels and Output Channels respectively channels in a compressor link share the same com pressor parameter settings When you change a compres sor parameter value for one of the linked channels the change is applied to all other linked channels Tip Compressor Link is not available for the ST IN Chan nels since they do not feature compressors Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups Follow the steps below to group faders or ON buttons for Input Channels or Output Channels 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until one of the pages that contains the desired group and channels appears In Fader page This page enables you to set Fader groups A H for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 Out Fader page This page enables you to set Fader groups Q T for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out In Fader page PAIRS GRUP Initial Data mrsr2srssra4 OO zu 9 9 INPUT FADER GROUP 2 HPLIT MASTER 12 34 3 1811 12 12 14 1E 16 1 HASTER 18 19 21 22 0514 151820 28 D E G H A D Gx H e In Mute page This page enables you to set Mute groups 1 for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 re
55. Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive For parameters with a data size of 2 or more data for that size will be transmitted 2 8 3 1 2 Parameter Change basic format Universal format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 Ottttttt 11110111 FO 43 in 3E tt ee eo dd F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Data type Element no If ee is 0 is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive For parameters with a data size of 2 or more data for that size will be transmitted 2 8 3 1 3 Parameter request basic format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00011010 Ottttttt 11110111 FO 43 3n 3E 1A tt ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96i Data type Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of ex
56. Now RM pe NN INSERT IN DIRECT OUT USB OUT 01V96i Reference Manual 5357 xipuaddy 126 Appendix Parameter Lists SLOT ADAT OMNI 2TR OUT Digital DIRECT OUT c O c NS BUS1 INS BUS2 INS BUS3 INS BUS4 INS BUSS INS BUS6 INS 57 INS BUS8 INS AUX1 INS AUX2 INS AUX3 INS AUX4 INS AUX5 INS AUX6 INS AUX7 INS AUX8 Source Source USB11 USB12 USB13 USB14 05815 05816 FX1 1 FX1 2 FX2 1 FX2 2 FX3 1 FX3 2 FX4 1 FX4 2 2TD L 2TD R Source NS BUS1 INS BUS2 INS BUS3 INS BUS4 INS BUSS INS BUS6 INS 57 INS BUS8 INS AUX1 INS AUX2 INS AUX3 INS AUX4 INS AUX5 INS AUX6 INS AUX7 INS AUX8 Description InsertOut BUS1 InsertOut BUS2 InsertOut BUS3 InsertOut BUS4 InsertOut BUS5 InsertOut BUS6 InsertOut BUS7 InsertOut BUS8 InsertOut AUX1 InsertOut AUX2 InsertOut AUX3 InsertOut AUX4 InsertOut AUX5 InsertOut AUX6 InsertOut AUX7 InsertOut AUX8 INS ST L InsertOut STL INS ST L InsertOut ST L INS ST R InsertOut STR INS ST R InsertOut ST R CAS BUST Cascade Out Bust __ 4 44 5 eS eee 5 cuo gt 5 2252 44 2 5 1 SEN NN 4 2 Lees 1421 55 44 5 gt RISE ee fe NEED INE Le de qwe ses M er iex oe ec
57. R Turn 2 Hd B IM 442 d d d TREMOLO Two input two output tremolo effect FREQ 095 4000 7 _ Modulation speed 100 H2 8 00 kre EQ peaking type requency taa 10000 EQ peaking type bandwidth Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 OE to determine FREQ 1 FAP B UIS de d ded d HQ PITCH One input two output high quality pitch shifter Available for internal effects 1 and 2 PITCH 12 to 12 semi Pitch shift tones FINE 50 to 50 cents Pitch shift fine Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus 20185222 values for reverse phase feed back Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 Nos to determine DELAY 1 PTT 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting DUAL PITCH Two input two output pitch shifter PITCH1 24 24 semi Channel 1 pitch shift tones FINET 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift Channel 1 level plus values for LEVEL 1 100 to 100 normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time Channel 1 feedback gain plus FB G 1 99 to 99 values for normal phase feed back minus values for reverse phase feedback PITCH2 224 0 24 semi Channel 2 pitch shift tones FINE 2 50 to
58. Surround Mode BUST BUS2 BUS3 8054 BUSS BUS6 BUS7 Tip You can the surround pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with them 01V96i Reference Manual Setting Up and Selecting Surround Modes 53 Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes To configure the surround environment select 3 1 5 1 or 6 1 Surround mode on the 01V96i and connect a DAW or multi channel monitoring system to the 01V96i 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Surr Mode page appears Initial Data 1001 112 STIS 5114 1 BUS SETUP 1 SURROUND MODE This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by using the following buttons The button that is turned on highlighted indicates the currently selected Surround mode The 01V96i uses normal stereo mode default EE Selects 3 1 Surround mode LE TERT Selects 5 1 Surround mode mo T Selects 6 1 Surround mode 2 PAN SURR LINK When this button is turned on Input Channel panpots and stereo surround panning are linked 3 LSURR BUS SETUP Press this button to display the Surr Bus Setup page which enables you to change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment 2 Move the cursor to the Surround mode but ton you want to use When you move the cursor to one of these but
59. The mode setting appears at the bot tom of each channel on a Channel or Meter Display page when you press and hold the button to which this function is assigned DAW AUTO STATUS Parameter Function Displays a Group ID to which each channel belongs below each chan DAW GROUP nel number on a Channel or Meter STATUS Display page in all caps for a main group and in lowercase letters for a sub group Pressing the key to which this func DAW MONI tion is assigned enables you to view STATUS the current monitoring mode and the channel strip type Pressing the key to which this func DAW CREATE tion is assigned enables you to exe GROUP cute the function specified in the menu of the Pro Tools Group list Suspends all mix groups temporarily 2 Press the button again to undo sus pension DAW WIN Shows or hides the Transport win TRANSPORT dow DAW WIN INSERT Shows or hides the Insert window Toggles between the Mix window MUT and Edit window Both windows are not displayed at the same time DAW WIN Shows or hides the Memory Loca MEM LOC tions window DAW WIN STATUS Shows or hides the Status window DAW UNDO Executes the Edit menu s Undo Redo command DAW SAVE Executes the Edit menu s Save com mand Pressing the button to which this function is assigned repeatedly PE Ee UMORE selects Shuffle Slip Spot or Grid edit mode in this order Pressing the button to which this function is ass
60. This parameter offsets the front to rear direction of the selected trajectory pattern 5 LFE This parameter control sets the level of the LFE Low Fre quency Effects Channel signal routed to the subwoofer and appears only in 5 1 and 6 1 Surround modes F R In 6 1 Surround mode F and R parameter controls appear The F parameter control determines how the Front Center signal is fed to the Left and Right channels and the R parameter control determines how the rear sur round signal is fed to the Left and Right surround chan nels 6 DIV This parameter control instead of the F R parameter control appears in 3 1 or 5 1 Surround mode and deter mines how the Center signal is fed to the Left Right and Center channels It is expressed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 When you set the parameter to 100 the Center signal is fed to only the Center channel When you set the parameter to 0 the Center signal is fed to only the Left and Right channels When you set the parameter to 50 the Center signal is fed equally to the Left Right and Center channels 7 LINK This button is available only in 6 1 Surround mode When you turn on this button the F and R controls are set to the same value and linked together ST LINK Turning on this button links the surround pan parame ters of two Input Channels that are currently displayed on the page Stereo Link function You can link the sur round pan parameters of t
61. You can set this parameter for each channel indepen dently if the GANG button is turned off on the INS DLY DLY page You can set this parameter for each channel indepen dently on the EQ ATT page but the paired channel set tings are linked on the EQ Edit and View pages Parameters marked with an asterisk are available only for Pus Out 1 8 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until the Pair Grup Out put page appears Initial Dota I STI1 STIZ STIS STIA 3 SURRDUMD MODE EUS 5 4 7 5 Ls Rs Ji m 54 6 Bs LFE The parameters on this page are described below 1 STEREO MONOx2 These buttons turn Bus or Aux Send pairs on or off 01V96i Reference Manual sng 34 Bus Outs FS Attenuating Output This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the i Input Channel Surround Pan when the 01V96i is in any 5 9 5 Surround mode other than Stereo When this button is turned on Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan This is useful for feeding Surround signals to exter nal Surround effects processors To attenuate the 01V96i s output signals display the EQ Out Att page and adjust the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 attenua tors individually If necessary you can also select Output and I O card channels and specity the amount of attenuation This technique is c
62. ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01V96i Reference Manual xipueddy 178 Appendix MIDI 2 8 2 18 Compressor library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS ID No SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n20 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C E 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01011001 59 Y Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA DATA NAME 2 8 2 19 Gate library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 1 127 Library no 128 256 CH1 287 CH32 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96i only the user area is valid 4 127 256 STATUS ID No SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 COUNT LOW 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 21 01001100 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 2
63. fm dquozzrxc 7 To use a mute group press one of the ON buttons for the grouped channels channels in the group switch their on off status I HPLIT OUTPUT IH FADER 2 Press the up A or down Y button to select a group Note INPUT FEDER MASTER While a mute group is enabled you cannot turn a subset 1234 567929 9011 12141516 1 2 ENABLE MASTER of the grouped channels on or off Ifyou wish to turn subset of grouped channels on or Ed off first turn offthe Enable button or remove the channels NUN you wish to turn on or off from the group 3 Press the SEL button for a channel you wish to add to the group The selected channel is marked with ig and the chan nel is added to the group Example Input Channels 1 4 7 8 and 15 16 have been added to Fader group C FADER GROUP E FADER MASTER 12 374 18 11 12 1 14 15 16 1 HASTER Ifyou add one channel from a pair to a group the pair partner is automatically added to the group You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers 4 In the same way press the SEL button for other channels you wish to add to the group The relative level ofthe faders for the grouped channels is determined by the position of the faders when the chan nels were added to the group The On Off status ofthe grouped channels is determined by the ON button s
64. tions on external machines v REM This button starts rewind on external machines M This button starts fast forward on external machines VOSTODP sacos This button stops external machines e PEAY nds This button starts playback on exter nal machines nho This button is used in conjunction with the PLAY button to start recording on external machines 4 FRAMES This parameter selects the timecode frame rate from 24 25 30D drop frame and 30 6 To control the transport functions move the cursor to the desired button in the TRANS PORT section then press ENTER Z If you desire move the cursor to the buttons and parameters in the LOCATE TIME section and the TRACK ARMING section then press the ENTER button or rotate the Parameter wheel to control the transport functions on external machines Tip You can also use the programmed User Defined buttons to control Machine Control functions For more information on assigning functions to the user defined keys refer to Using the User Defined Keys in the Owners Manual separate booklet 01 V96i Reference Manual O J3u05 100 MIDI This chapter describes the 0179615 MIDI related functions MIDI amp the 01V96i Using Control Changes Program Changes and other MIDI messages enables you to recall Scenes and edit parameters on the 01V96i and store 01V96i internal data on external MIDI devices The 0
65. 4 Press ENTER to confirm the change If you move the cursor to another parameter box or dis play another page before you press the ENTER button all settings on this page will be cancelled 01 V96i Reference Manual indul 48 Input amp Output Patching 5 Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter Viewing and Changing Insert In box then rotate the Parameter wheel or Patch press the INC DEC buttons to select the atc inputs ADAT IN channels or slot input chan You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert nels to be patched to the Insert In Ins of all Input Channels or all Output Channels This is Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for useful when you wish to find out if multiple channels have the more information on the parameter values see page 43 same patch 6 Press ENTER to confirm the change 1 To view the Input Channels Insert Ins press the PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Input Ins page appears Tip Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor but tons to select an item to be patched then press ENTER Initial Dota 5112 8 8114 Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The aJ G G 22 selected item is now patched Assisn 8 This page dis
66. Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a mal function may occur 2 Ver X XX X XX represents the version number This indicator identifies the system version number Check the current system version number before you update the firmware Visit the following website to check the latest system ver sion number http www yamahaproaudio com Calibrating the Faders The 01V96i motorized fader positions may shift over time depending on the operating conditions and environment You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration func tion 1 Make sure that the power to the 01V96i is turned off 2 Press and hold down the ENTER button then turn on the POWER ON OFF switch After a while the following calibration window appears 91496 FADER CALIBRATION FADER HOVE FADER POSITION FADER HOVE OHLY FADER POSITION OHLY QUIT Select Henu Using Cursor Keys Press ENTER to Start Calibration 3 Make sure that 1 FADER MOVE amp FADER POSITION is selected then press ENTER To adjust only the motor fader movement use the cursor buttons to select 2 FADER MOVE ONLY then press ENTER To adjust only the fader position use the cursor buttons to select 3 FADER POSITION ONLY then press ENTER Proceed to Step 5 To cancel the calibration operation use the cursor but tons to select 4 QUIT then press ENTER The 01V96i starts in normal mode The calibration operatio
67. Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl 4 01V96i Reference Manual IAIN xipueddy 176 Appendix MIDI DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010110 00000000 Obbbbbbb Ottttttt Obbbbbbb 11110111 20 20 38 43 39 33 56 00 ds de ee F7 b 0 7 bank no A H total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number User define key data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 8 User Defined Keys bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010110 00000000 Obbbbbbb 11110111 FO 43 2 4 40 20 20 38 43 39 23 56 00 bb F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 4 b 0 7 bank of exclusive 2 8 2 9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number Be aware that the state of the transmission destinatio
68. Output Input Patching h n 9 Follow steps below to change Input Patch 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Patch page This chapter describes how to patch assign signal paths appears within the 01V96i to its inputs outputs and slot channels Initial Data 2111 112 STI3 5 14 CH1 CH EDIT G d IHPLIT PATCH Input Patching Signals input at INPUT connectors 1 16 ADAT IN connec tor IN DIGITAL connectors and Slot I O card are patched to Input Channels for use Patch example Input Patching INPUT connector 1 gt Input Channel 1 INPUT connector 2 INPUT connector 3 INPUT connector 4 INPUT connector 5 INPUT connector 6 INPUT connector 7 INPUT connector 8 Input Channel 2 Input Channel 3 Inputs ADAT IN channels TO HOST USB channels and Input Channel 4 slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Chan nels are shown in the parameter boxes 1 below the channel numbers The parameter indicators are explained below By default Input Channels are patched as follows 5101 5116 01 51 16 Slot Channels 1 16 Channels 1 16 50 uts 1 amp 2 EL Internal Effects Input Channels Input connectors and Slot channels 1 1 amp FX1 2 1 6 INPUT connectors 1 16 17 24 ADAT IN Input Channels 1 8 Input Channel 5 Input Channel 6 Input Channel 7 Input Channel 8 FX2 1 amp F
69. PGM CHG column and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the Program Change numbers to which you want to assign Scenes 5 Press the cursor button p gt to move the cur sor to a parameter box in the SCENE NO TITLE column then rotate the Parame ter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select Scenes Tip e If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes the Program Change with the lowest number becomes effec tive Youcan initialize the Scene to Program Change assign ment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE but ton then pressing ENTER 6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to display the MIDI Setup page then specify the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels 7 Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON OFF and Rx ON OFF buttons Now when the 01V96i receives the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels the corresponding Scenes are recalled Also when you switch Scenes on the 01V 96i the 01V96i transmits the Program Changes on the speci fied MIDI Channels 01 V96i Reference Manual ICHIA 104 Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control You can assign 01V96i parameters to MIDI Control Changes for real time control When the 01V96i receives a Control Change the assigned 01V96i parameter is set accordingly Also when you adjust a parameter on the 01V96i the 01V96i transmits the assigned Co
70. Section MONITOR 2TR IN amp G _ 0 LeveL 19 0 LEVEL MONITOR PHONES OUT 1 2TR IN OUT connectors 2 Monitor Source selector 3 MONITOR LEVEL control 4 PHONES LEVEL control 5 PHONES jack Control Surface Channel Strip Section 1 SEL buttons 2 SOLO buttons 3 ON buttons 4 Channel faders 01V96i Reference Manual SEL SOLO O OMS Jeay DNS 043005 8 Control Surface amp Rear Panel STEREO Section 1 SEL button 2 ON button 3 STEREO fader 2 3 ST IN Section D 1 ST IN button 2 SEL buttons 2 3 SOLO buttons 3 4 ON buttons SOLO 5010 5 Level controls 4 gt ST IN 1 8 ST IN 2 24 FADER MODE Section 1 AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons 2 HOME button FADER MODE 2 5 S S AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 1 2 DISPLAY ACCESS Section 0 9 DISPL Y 55 6 SCENE DIO SETUP MIDI UTILITY 7 REST PATCH DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT VIEW 1 SCENE button 2 DIO SETUP button 3 MIDI button 4 UTILITY button 5 INSERT DELAY button 6 PAN ROUTING button 7 PAIR GROUP button PATCH button 9 DYNAMICS button EO button 17 EFFECT button 42 VIEW b
71. The following buttons are available in this window VERTICAL button CANCEL The function of each mode is described below Cancels the operation HORIZONTAL CHx2 y This button pairs adjacent odd even channels default Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even VERTICAL mE This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader e g CH1 amp CH17 CH16 amp 32 etc This mode is useful when Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd you wish to use one fader to control both stereo channels channel RESET BOTH When you switch the Pair Mode the combinations of Resets both channel parameters to the default settings channel numbers displayed on the page also change same as when Channel memory 01 is recalled Note When Pair mode is switched only the channel numbers change The mix parameters of the paired partners do not change Move the cursor to the desired button then press ENTER to confirm the pair Tip Pressing and holding down the first SEL button of the For example if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to Vertical the Input Channel 2 indication changes to Input Channel 17 However its parameters do not change If Channels 1 and 2 have been paired switching the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17 paired channels and pressing the second SEL button cancels the pair Move the cursor to t
72. While you are holding down the AUX 6 button the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates DFLT AUX 7 button When this button is turned on you can adjust the selected channel panpot using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control If you turn on this button while a Channel Dis play mode page is selected you can adjust each channel panpot using parameter controls 1 16 To adjust the stereo channel panpots press this button repeatedly to toggle between L and R channels AUX 8 button Use this button along with the desired SEL button to assign a plug in to the corresponding Pro Tools channel see page 90 HOME button This button turns Flip mode see page 90 on or off Flip mode enables you to adjust the Aux Send parameters using the faders ON buttons and the PAN control DAW REC DAW PLAY DISPLAY ACCESS section PAIR GROUP button Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode page is selected to display a Group ID to which each channel belongs EFFECT button Press this button to display or hide the Insert window in Pro Tools Display section F1 button Press this button to reset the Clipping and Peak Hold indicators on Meter Display mode pages Tab Scroll buttons lt B These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT param eter settings on Insert Display mode pages Data Entry section ENTER button This button switches the on off status of the buttons on t
73. YAMAHA OIV DIGITAL MIXING CONSOL n Reference Manual How to Use This Reference Manual The 01V96i Reference Manual this document allows you to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text Searching for terms To search for a term use the search function of the software youre using to view this document If youre using Adobe Reader enter the term in the search box and press the Enter key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of that term Note The latest version of Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the following URL http www adobe com products reader html Displaying the next previous view If youre using Adobe Reader you can jump to the previous next view in your viewing history This is a convenient way to jump back to the previous page after you ve used a link to jump to a different page Note Ifthe Previous View Next View buttons are not shown in the toolbar you can hold down your computer keyboards Alt key and use the lt lt gt lt gt gt keys to jump to the previous or next View For details on using other PDF viewing software refer to the owners manual of the software youre using Using the Function Tree A function tree for the 01V96i is provided on page 4 and fol lowing You can use this to quickly find the explanatory page you want 2 Contents Contents How to Use This Reference Manual
74. YES button then press ENTER Tip If the REMOTE parameter box is grayed out proceed to Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET parameter then return to Steps 2 and 3 4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears 5 Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter box rotate the Parameter wheel to select USER DEFINED then press ENTER The confirmation window for changing the setting appears Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The display changes as follows SETUP Initial Datla 5 2 13 5 14 al REMOTE TRANSMIT 1 TRANSMIT ENABLE DISABLE This button switches the MIDI Remote function between enable and disable 2 INITIALIZE This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected by the BANK parameter their default settings 3 BANK This parameter enables you to select one of four banks 4 ID SHORT LONG These parameters display the channel names The ID parameter displays the channel ID 1 16 for the currently controlled MIDI device 5 ON section This section displays the type of MIDI messages in hexa decimal or alphabet assigned to the ON buttons for the currently selected channels 01 16 LATCH UNLATCH This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for ON button operation
75. continuously changing values in the range of 00 to 7F 0 127 in decimal are output 01V96i Reference Manual MIDI Remote Layer 97 Tip If SW is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section the current MIDI messages are output ee Note Be sure to set one of DATA parameter boxes of the FADER section to FAD If no FAD is assigned fader oper ation is ignored 9 Move the cursor to the LATCH UNLATCH but ton then press ENTER to select LATCH or UNLATCH depending on how you want the ON buttons to function e Pressing the ON buttons repeat edly transmits alternating On and Off messages Pressing and holding down ON buttons transmits On messages and releasing the ON buttons transmits Off messages Tip Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the ON buttons behave when Latch or Unlatch is selected When SW is assigned LATCH MIDI data transmission MIDI data transmission SW 7F SW 00 Illuminated C 25 Mira ura UNLATCH MIDI data MIDI data transmission transmission SW 7F SW 00 Illuminated Off 1 8502 When SW is not assigned e UNLATCH MIDI data transmission Illuminated Tip In most situations select Unlatch if SW is not assigned 10 To change the channel name move the cur sor to the
76. dB 76077 Threshold dB 1 Release ms Attack ms 8 Threshold dB 8 Out gain dB Ratio 1 Attack m Release ms Out gain dB Threshold dB 1 Release ms Attack ms 0 Threshold dB EXPAND Out gain dB Ratio 21 Attack m A Guitar COMP Release ms Out gain dB Threshold dB 8 _ Ratio 1 Release ms Attack ms Threshold dB COMPAND S Out gain dB 0 0 Ratio 1 Width dB Attack ms Strings COMP Release ms Out gain dB Release ms 749 N A Piano2 01V96i Reference Manual 5151 xipuaddy 150 Appendix Parameter Lists Threshold dB Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 Ratio 1 Attack ms 93 39 Atack ms 93 T m 9 Out gain dB Out gain dB 4 2 Knee Knee Fa 2 Threshold dB Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms 1 Sites loon 1 Out gain dB 2 Ratio 1 Knee Strings3 COMP BrassSection COMP COMPAND H SamplingPerc COMPAND S Attack ms 8 Sampling COMP Knee Meam 8 Out gain a6 Hip Comp COMPAND S Out gain 00 Threshold dB _8 29 Solo Vocal2 COMP Release ms 331 N N Knee Width Release ms Threshold dB a Ratio 1 Attack 20 Out gain dB Width dB 90 Release ms Threshol
77. digital mixer MODEL ID 00011010 OlV96i ADDRESS 00100000 20 Key remote Okkkkkkk Key address Okkkkkkk kk Key address Okkkkkkk kk Key address L DATA Oppppppp pp Release 0 Press 1 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 23 Parameter change Remote Meter When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter the specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds When you want to transmit meter information continuously a Request must be trans mitted continuously within every 10 seconds Reception This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission has been enabled by a Request the parameter specified by Address will be transmitted on the Rx CH channel at 50 msec intervals for a duration of 10 seconds Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again or if the PORT setting is changed If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL D digital mixer MODEL ID 00011010 1 01 961 ADDRESS 00100001 21 Remote meter Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL DATA Oddddddd dd Datal H Datal L EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Meter data uses the unmodified DECAY val
78. including Input Channels 1 32 ST IN Channels 1 4 Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 Stereo Out internal effects USER DEFINED Remote layers and plug in effects The Recall Safe func tion is effective on channels and functions for which the buttons are turned on Sorting Scenes You can sort Scenes in Scene memories 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Sort page appears EXTRA 511 512 5113 5114 pe 9 DESTINATI OH Data Data ESTRA MIS Data ENDING Data 2 Data VOCAL OFF ENDING Mla Mla VOCAL OFF INTRO MIs Mi SRC A PASIE DSTA 2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list 1 in the left column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the Scene memory you wish to move Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list 2 in the right column then rotate the Parame ter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the position to which you want to move the source Scene memory 4 Press ENTER to move the source Scene memory to the specified destination The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly 01V96i Reference Manual Copying and Pasting a Scene Global Paste 73 Copyi ng and Pasting a 5 Use the Parameter wheel or INC DEC but tons to select the destination scene s lo bal Pas te Scenes specified be
79. o o NOASSIGN o 9 NOASSIGN J J NOASSIGN o o H6 NOASIN 117 NOASSIGN J J CHANNEL7 mon ma iw CO possen 6 t0 m 7 to n s t to NOASIGN 26 NOASSIGN SS 27 NOASSIGN NN so NOASSIGN 31 NOANGN 32 NOASSIGN 7 O 58 NOASSIGN Initial Parameter to Control Change Table mon ma iw NOASSIGN NOASSIGN ooo o G NOASSIGN 6 NOASSIGN FH MD FH MD INPUIS 6 to FH MD EQ INPUTI7 86 FH MID 8 O O 8 tQ 90 INPUTZ NOASSIGN J 01 V96i Reference Manual 163 xipueddy 164 Appendix MIDI CHANNELS mon ma w LO NOWSICN 1 6 tQ
80. 3 17 Parameter request Reception Function call link device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the corresponding effect s function activates depending on the effect type STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010010 12 Function call Effect Event 0000 Of function 00000000 00 Oppppppp pp Release 0 Press 1 DATA 00000000 00 Oeeeeeee ee Effect number 0 Effect1 3 Effect4 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function channel Freeze Play button Freeze Record button 0x00 0x01 0 Effect1 3 Effect4 0 Effect1 3 Effect4 This does not activate when the effect type is different This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O0011nnnn 3n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 0001
81. 34 Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs sss 35 AUX 36 36 Setting Aux 1 8 from the Display 36 Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Control Surface 38 Setting AUK Send BD 38 Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels 40 Panne AUD Sens 41 Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends 42 Input amp Output Patching 43 Input 43 44 Patching 46 Irsert P3tehlle Gi du 47 MOnitoring rc 49 tie n D du tette n e me ec cdd 49 Monitor and Solo Setup Lets fracture intet onte dd 49 Usine the MONOT qo ttu 50 Using the Solo Function 51 SUPPOUNG Pai Dern eo ese 52 About Surround uio opea espiritu 52 Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes 53 Surround oar tiun ad o oo 56 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters 59 ados depu a ds 59 Using Fader Groups and Mute 59 Using Fader Group 61 Using Mute Grou
82. 4 End of exclusive 2 8 2 11 Control change table bulk dump format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01000011 00000010 00000000 Ottttttt Obbbbbbb Oddddddd 11110111 FO 43 On 7E ch 4 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 43 02 00 tt bb ds de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl No 256 Current total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Control change table data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 12 Control change table bulk dump request format STATUS LD No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01000011 00000010 00000000 11110111 FO 43 2n 4 40 20 20 38 43 39 33 43 02 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 4 EE No 256 Current End of exclusive 01V96i Reference Manual MIDI Data For
83. 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine Channel 2 level plus values for LEVEL 2 100 to 100 normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan DELAY 2 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time Channel 2 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feed FB G2 back minus values for reverse phase feedback SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 MATES MN to determine Channel 1 delay Used in conjunction with TEMPO TEE to determine Channel 2 delay 1 a d 4 d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 01 V96i Reference Manual 51511 xipuaddy 136 Appendix Parameter Lists ROTARY One input two output rotary speaker simulator ROTATE START SPEED SLOW FAST Rotation speed see SLOW and FAST parameters SLOW 0 05 10 00 Hz SLOW rotation speed High frequency filter RING MOD Two input two output ring modulator SOURCE OSC SELF Modulation source oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 10 0 5000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0 100960 c frequency modulation SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 FF BUS FB D ded d MOD FILTER Two input two output modulation filter FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth
84. Bus Setup page 01 V96i Reference Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 23 s When this button is turned on the currently selected Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus 0 D When this button is turned on the currently selected Input Channel is routed to its Direct Out See page 46 for more information on the Direct Out 5 ALL STEREO This button turns on the S button for all channels on the page 6 ALL BUS This button turns on the Bus buttons 1 8 for all channels on the page 7 ALL CLEAR This button clears all routing assignments on the page SURROUND MODE This field displays the current Surround mode Tip The routings of the ST IN Channels L R are linked The D button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels Viewing Input Channel Settings You can view and adjust parameter settings for the cur rently selected Input Channel on the View Parameter or Fader pages Viewing the Gate Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View Parameter page for a specific Input Channel use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button repeatedly Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons or ENTER button to modify the setting GATE THRES RANGE ise RT fal tial genT STIZ STI3 T 4 EDIT erm Q
85. Ch Edit page 56 Channel display mode 86 MOD DBEAY 133 25 Channel levels 89 MOD EDETER 136 ROUTI 16 page 22 Control surface operation 87 MONITOR LEVEL control 7 ROUTI7 STI page 22 Explicit 89 Monitor out amp Headphones section Pan Route Surr ST IN page 58 90 7 Pan Route Surr1 16 page 58 mute 89 MONITOR OUT connectors 10 13 Pan Route Surr17 32 page 58 Insert display mode 85 Monitor Source selector 7 PAN ROUTING button 8 Meter display mode 86 Monitoring 49 Mode page 53 84 Digital input channel status 14 PAN SURR etes 53 MUI 90 AS TS O 90 rd 22 41 89 90 MIXSOLO endete 50 I oae sce tte deed 34 PHO eite eO ERAS 90 MIEXDOW IN 49 FOLLOW PAN 24 PEE OF eet 90 rut 50 GANG eae ee ee 22 Scrub amp Shuttle
86. E Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00Hz Modulation speed 0 10090 Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance DLY BAL 0 100 0 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO E to determine DELAY EUM NOT Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 3 d 5 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 B JI FB h 4h d 4 d d 5 01 V96i Reference Manual Effects Parameters 141 MULTI FILTER Two input two output 3 band multi filter 24 dB octave TYPE 1 HPF LPF BPF Filter 1 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 2 HPF LPF BPF Filter 2 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 3 HPF LPF BPF Filter 3 type high pass low pass band pass FREQ 1 26 0160 KH trequeny 0 100 Filter 1 level CONTI INPUT One input one output basic sampler Available for Recording delay For plus values 1000 to REGEM 1000 ms ger is received plays only while the that the pressed The number of times the input signal internal effects 1 and 2 recording starts after the trigger is received For minus values Input trigger level i e the
87. GANG button When this button is turned on highlighted the delay time for each channel in a channel pair can be set simul taneously When this option is turned off the delay time can be set for each channel in a channel pair individually 3 Channel section You can set individual delay parameters here The delay parameters include the following items ON OFF This button switches the corresponding channel delay on or off e msec This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds meter feet sample beat frame The delay time can be set using units of meters feet sam ples beats or frames which you select by using the DELAY SCALE buttons 01V96i Reference Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 19 e MIX This parameter sets the mix balance of dry Input Chan nel and wet delayed signals FB GAIN This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback Tip e This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels e The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which the 01V96i is operating If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button the dis tance value can be converted to the delay time based on sonic speeds about 343 59 m sec at 20 degrees Celsius This option is useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between two sound sources that are far apart If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button a parameter box for setting a note that represents the
88. Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums 4 A Dr SN GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums Compressor Library This library enables you to store and recall settings for the compressors on Input Channels Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out The library contains 36 preset memories and 92 user readable amp writable memories Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS but ton then press the F4 button The Dynamics Comp Lib page appears CURRENT CURVE Initial lata 2711 SEHE Ste Stilt TAS 0 G 0 CURRENT LIBRARY TITLE H BD H Dr BD LamPandert5 LamrandertH3 1 CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently selected channel comp type Compressor Expander Compander Soft Compander Hard 2 CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current compressor curve 3 GR meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the compressor and the post comp levels of the currently selected channel and its available pair part ner 4 Type amp Curve section The type and curve of the currently selected memory is displayed here 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels You can now store the selected channel comp settings and recall the compressor library memories to channels For details on sto
89. However if an error occurs and the unit is trying calibration again only the SEL button indicator of a problematic fader flashes CONTINUE While the SEL button indicator ofa problematic fader is flashing the calibration process returns to Step 5 START FROM THE BEGINNING The calibration process returns to Step 2 QUIT ANYWAY The 01V96i cancels the calibration operation and starts in normal mode The standard setting will be applied to problematic faders 7 Follow the instruction in the window to set the position of the selected faders to then press ENTER If this window appears after you try the calibration pro 8 Set the position of the selected faders to the cess several times consult your nearest Yamaha dealer level instructed in the window then press ENTER Set faders 1 16 to 15 and Stereo fader to 30 9 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window then press ENTER Set faders 1 16 to 0 and Stereo fader to any position 10 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window then press ENTER Set faders 1 16 to 10 and Stereo fader to 0 If there is no problem with the calibration result this con cludes the calibration operation The 01V96i will start in normal mode 01 V96i Reference Manual If the calibration data has some problems the 01 7961 dis plays the following window when it starts up In this case
90. ID LONG parameter box then press ENTER to display the Title Edit window For more information on entering names refer to Title Edit Window in the Owner s Manual separate booklet Tip Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then press ENTER A window is displayed that enables you to reset the parameter settings in the currently selected bank Youcanalso assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes manually without using the LEARN button 01 V96i Reference Manual 98 Remote Control Machine Control Function The 01V96i can control the transport functions and select tracks on external recording machines that support MMC by transmitting commands via the MIDI OUT port or USB port Note Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected devices Refer to the Users Manual for the external device for more information on controllable parameters 1 Refer to the diagram below for information on connecting the 01V96i to an external device MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN Sus 3 000009 oe 0 0 0 9286 9 099e90690292929 1 e MMC supported eee 9 22 5 M sm om onm Sm ood ond QV machine THe YAMAHA 2 2 2 2 2 Oum 9mm Oren ETE
91. LINK INPUT COMP LINK OUTPUT COMP LINK INPUT FADER GROUP MASTER OUTPUT FADER GROUP MASTER INPUT PATCH INPUT INSERT IN PATCH EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT PATCH CASCADE IN PATCH INPUT CHANNEL NAME INPUT PATCH LIBRARY SLOT OUTPUT PATCH USB OUT PATCH OUTPUT INSERT IN PATCH DIRECT OUT DESTINATION 2TR OUT DIGITAL PATCH OUTPUT CHANNEL NAME OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY GATE EDIT GATE LIBRARY COMP EDIT COMP LIBRARY EQUALIZER EDIT EQUALIZER LIBRARY INPUT ATTENUATOR OUTPUT ATTENUATOR FX1 EDIT FX2 EDIT FX3 EDIT FX4 EDIT FX1 LIBRARY FX2 LIBRARY FX3 LIBRARY FX4 LIBRARY PLUG IN EFFECT CARD EDIT PARAMETER VIEW FADER VIEW CHANNEL LIBRARY INPUT CH1 16 AUX VIEW INPUT CH17 ST IN AUX VIEW 61 61 43 48 64 67 23 31 37 24 38 75 40 40 Function Tree 5 FADER MODE BUTTON FUNCTION PAGE NAME LINK SEND AUX1 AUX8 SEND 38 PAN AUX1 AUX8 41 AUXT1 AUX8 VIEW1 16 INPUT CH1 16 AUX VIEW 40 VIEW17 STI Dis CH17 ST IN AUX 40 CH1 32 CH1 32 METER 8 ST IN ST IN METER 8 MASTER MASTER METER 8 EFFECT 1 4 INPUT OUTPUT METER EFFECT METER 8 STEREO STEREO METER 8 POSITION METER POSITION 8 LAYER BUTTON FUNCTION PAGE NAME LINK 1 16 8 17 32 8 MASTER 8 REMOTE USER DEFINED 94 ProTools 83 Nuendo 93 Cubase 93 General DAW 94 USER ASSIGNABLE 110 LAYER 01V96i Reference Manual 904 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Control Surface amp Rear Panel Contro
92. LOW but ton is selected the fader resolution switches to 256 steps 01 V96i Reference Manual Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall 103 Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall You can assign 01V96i Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall When you recall a Scene on 01V96i the unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the connected MIDI device When the 01V96i receives a Program Change the assigned Scene is recalled Initially Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Pro gram Changes 1 through 99 and Scene 0 is assigned to Pro gram Change 100 although you can change these assignments Tip You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the Studio Manager software 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI mes sages see page 101 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F2 button The MIDI Pgm Asgn page appears Initial Data miseri Stile STI3 STI4 dak GI PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN TABLES CHG SCENE HO TITLE Data Data Data Data Data 4 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the
93. Lor T nu 7 2 _ 36 dB SedE ATTACK DECAY LOH L MID H MID HigH 7 5 L SHELF GTE H SHELF e a m nx GLE EN 5 a Gms dms OFF HOLD zz mz QUTGAIH The following parameters are available sections marked with an asterisk are unavailable for the ST IN Channels 1 GATE section This section enables you to turn the gate type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters See page 19 for more information 2 COMP section This section enables you to turn the compressor type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters See page 20 for more information 3 INSERT section This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and patch the Insert In and Out See page 47 for more infor mation 4 EQ section This section enables you to set various EQ parameters See page 21 for more information 5 Meters These meters indicate the signal levels of the cur rently selected Input Channel and its available pair part ner 6 Phase section You can reverse the signal phase of the currently selected Input Channel See page 18 for more information 01V96i Reference Manual sjouueu andu 24 Input Channels 7 DELAY section This section enables you to set the currently selected channel s Delay function See page 18 for more inform
94. Note You cannot pair an ST IN channel 1 4 with an Input Chan nel To pair channels or to cancel channel pairs you can use the SEL buttons on the top panel or access the Pair Grup pages 01 V96i Reference Manual Pairing Input Channels 27 Pairing Channels by Using the Pairing Input Channels Using the SEL Buttons Display 1 While pressing and holding down the SEL 1 Press the PAIR GROUP button repeatedly button for one of the channels you wish to until the Pair Grup Input page appears pair press the SEL button for the adjacent channel The paired channel numbers should be odd and even in this order 2 When the Pair Confirmation check box is on see page 109 the Channel Pairing window appears 5 15 CHHHHEL FAIRING HOHOx 2 Fair CANCEL 2 CHz 1 RESET BOTH OUTPUT FADER Fi MUTE The parameters on this page are described below Note You can pair only channels that are adjacent odd even CD PAIR MODE in this order channels Pressing the SEL button for Determines how channels are paired non adjacent channel will be ignored You cannot create or cancel a pair of vertical partners 2 STEREO MONO xZ These buttons turn pairs on or off 3 Move the cursor to the desired button in the 2 Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter Channel Pairing window then press ENTER field then select the HORIZONTAL
95. OUT channels 1 8 2TROUT DIGITALL amp R channels o 5 p m 3 Move cursor to the parameter value in the right column 2 then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the amount of attenuation The amount of attenuation can set from 0 dB to 9 dB Tip To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels to 0 dB move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then press ENTER 01V96i Reference Manual Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs You can change the default Bus names BUS1 AUX4 STE REO etc It may be convenient to name the buses Monitor Out or Effect Send for example so that you can easily iden tify the signal type 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Name page appears ALS AUKS ID BUS CBUS gt BUS BUSH gt BUSS BUSS 5 BUS4 CBUS4 5 BUSS BUSS 2 BUS CBUS2 gt BUS 1 CBUS1 3 ALCS LAUKS 2 CAU 3 AUXG 2 AUS 5 3 gt 2 Initial EDIT SHORT Bluse 8055 gt 8054 gt BUS2 gt 8051 AUS gt AUT AUXE gt gt AUS E Inrut Auto Corps BUST BUSA 8055 8054 8053 LONG Y YY Y OUT IHITIALIZE OUT You can
96. SS dence ec WIL oe 1 4 7 qox 52 42 404512 22 qe Description USB CH11 IN USB CH12 IN USB CH13 IN USB CH14 IN USB CH15 IN USB CH16 IN Effect OUT 1 Effect OUT 2 Effect2 OUT 1 Effect2 OUT 2 Effect3 OUT 1 Effect3 OUT 2 Effect4 OUT 1 Effect4 OUT 2 2TR IN Dig L 2TR IN Dig R Description Description InsertOut BUS1 InsertOut BUS2 InsertOut BUS3 InsertOut BUS4 InsertOut BUS5 InsertOut BUS6 InsertOut BUS7 InsertOut BUS8 InsertOut AUX1 InsertOut AUX2 InsertOut AUX3 InsertOut AUX4 InsertOut AUX5 InsertOut AUX6 InsertOut AUX7 InsertOut AUX8 01 V96i Reference Manual Initial Output Patch Settings SLOT ADAT OUT OMNI OUT DIRECT OUT ADAT2 ADAT3 ADAT4 ADAT5 ADAT6 ADM S ADNB 20 Initial Output Patch Settings 127 2TR OUT Digital CHANNEL NAME 7 CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX AUXS AUX6 AUX BUS USB 01V96i Reference Manual 5357 xipuaddy 128 Appendix Parameter Lists User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings Bank 1 GM Vol amp Pan Name eg TT TA Te Ts 7 8 Tu ua use lu NET pom eoe ENS
97. Sends You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching effects processor inputs to Aux Outs and effects processor outputs to ST IN Channels 1 Recall an effect program you wish to use Refer to page 76 for more information on recalling effect programs 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Effect page appears This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1 4 Initial lata EDIT ER EFFECTA REVERE PLATE F This page contains the following parameters 1 IN These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the effects processors 2 OUT These parameter boxes select the destination of the sig nals output from the effects processors 3 H button This button recalls the FX1 Edit FX4 Edit pages which enable you to adjust the effect parameters 01 V96i Reference Manual Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels 65 3 To select a signal to be input to the effects processor move the cursor to the desired In parameter box select a signal from the fol lowing options then press ENTER No assignment 8 Aux Sends 1 8 INS CHI 32 Input Channel 1 32 Insert Out INS BUSI 8 Bus 1 8 Insert Out INS 1 8 Aux Send 1 8 Insert Out INS ST L R Stereo Out Insert Out To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends select
98. User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 129 Bank 2 GM Vol amp Effect 1 uU VOL amp EFF1 GM CH02 VOL amp EFF1 RMO3 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH04 VOL amp EFF1 GM CHO05 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH06 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH07 VOL amp EFF1 es GM CH08 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH09 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH10 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH11 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH12 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH13 VOL amp EFF1 GM CH14 VOL amp EFF1 15 15 15 VOL amp EFF1 16 16 GM CH16 VOL amp EFF1 Data Format Control 2134 56 e 2 FADER Bo 07 ON a rs FAR 83 07 ranjeno FADEN 07 PAD END FADER esie oe aet eee CERTES UNDER B8 ses e
99. a recording deck and a reproduction deck You can change the tonal char acter by adjusting various elements such as the deck type tape quality and playback speed Swss70 Swss78 Selects the type of recording Adjusts the input level of the recording deck As you raise the REC LVL 96 0 to 18 098 level tape compression is gener ated narrowing the dynamic range and distorting the sound REC HI _6 0 to 6 0dB Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck REC BIAS 1 00 to 1 00 S the bias of the recording If this is on operating the recording deck s level RECORD REC LVL knob will cause the reproduction deck s MAKEUP ON OFF level REPRODUCE REPR LVL knob to move in tandem main taining a fixed output level This allows you to change the amount of distortion without changing the output level REPR Swss70 Swss78 Selects the type of reproduction DECK Swss85 70 deck REPR LVL _96 0 to 418 0 dB Adjusts the output level of the reproduction deck Adjusts the high range gain of REPRHI ud M the reproduction deck REPR LO 60 0 46 0 dB Adjusts the low range gain of the reproduction deck TP SPEED 15 ips 30 ips Selects the tape speed TP KIND New Old Selects the type of tape 01 V96i Reference Manual 51511 xipuaddy 144 Appendix Parameter Lists REV X Hall REV X Room REV X Plate This is a 2 in 2 out reverb algorithm It provides rich high density reverber
100. and Output patching to the libraries recalling a Scene may change the current patching About Scene Numbers Scene memories are numbered with U or from 00 through 99 You can store Scenes in Scene memories 01 99 When you recall a Scene the Scene memory number appears at the top of the display page Scene memory 00 is a special read only memory that contains the default settings of all mix parameters To reset all mix parameters on the 01 V96i to their initial or default values recall Scene memory 0 Also the Initial Data Nominal check box on the Setup 1 page see page 109 enables you to specify whether Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or dB when Scene memory 0 is recalled Scene memory Ud is a special read only memory that contains the mix settings in effect immediately before the most recently recalled or stored Scene To undo or redo Scene memory recall and store operations recall Scene mem ory U When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene the Edit indicators appear at the top of the display indicat ing that the mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most recently recalled The contents of the Edit Buf fer where the current mix settings are stored are retained while the 01V96i is turned off This allows the 01V96i to restore the edited mix settings when you turn on the power The contents of recalled Scene memory 2 match the current 02
101. be output SOLO MID OFF ON If this is on only the mid fre quency band will be output SOLO If this is on only the high fre HIGH OFTON quency band will be output 1 6 5 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz 276 2765 This emulates characteristics of an analog com pressor that has become a standard item in recording studios It thickens the sound and is particularly suitable for drum and bass sounds Comp276 lets you control two monaural channels independently Comp276S links the L R channel parameters for control RATIO A LIT Adjusts the ratio If this is on the output gain will MAKEUP OFF automatically be compensated to make up for gain reduction applied by the compressor If this is on the compressor effect in the low frequency SIDE HPF ON OFF range will be reduced thus boosting the low frequency out put This shows the amount of gain GR meter ON OFF reduction when the compressor is operating 260 2605 This emulates characteristics of a compres sor limiter of the mid 1970s that has now become a standard item for live sound reinforcement Comp260 lets you control two monaural channels independently Comb260S links the L R channel parameters for control SOFT MEDIUM ra HARD Adjusts the knee ST LINK ON OFF If this 5 on CH1 and CH2 will be stereo linked OUTPUT 20 0 to 40 0dB Adjusts t
102. beat and a parameter box for a tempo setting appear below the DELAY SCALE parameter Setting the note and BPM settings in these param eter boxes enables you to set a delay time that synchronizes to the song tempo Gating Input Channels To set the Input Channel gates use the SEL buttons to select the desired Input Channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F1 button The Dynamics Gate Edit page appears ics 5112 5 3 Stitt n lata Oo TE EDIT CH1 CURVE PARAMETER THRESHOLD RANGE ATTACH 26 0dE 56dB DECAY HOLD EDIT COMP EDIT GATE LIE fA 1 KEYIN SOURCE Select one of the following buttons to determine the trig ger source for the currently selected Input Channel s gate e SELBE The selected channel s own input sig nal is the trigger source CHANNEL Another Channels input signal is the trigger source Select the desired channel in the parameter box below the CHANNEL button An Aux Send signal is the trigger source Select the desired bus in the parameter box below the AUX but ton 2 STEREO LINK This parameters ON OFF button enables you to pair gates for stereo operation even when the Input Channels are not paired 3 CURVE This area displays the current gate curve 4 TYPE This area displays the current ga
103. booklet for more information on entering char acters 2 RECALL This button recalls the contents of the selected library memory If you turn on the Recall Confirmation param eter on the DIO Setup 1 page the 01V96i displays a memory recall confirmation window 3 STORE This button stores the settings to the selected memory Before you store the settings you can enter or edit the title using the Title Edit window You can disable the Title Edit window by turning off the Store Confirmation parameter on the DIO Setup 1 page If you bypass the Edit Title window the name New Data will be used as a title for the Scene memory 4 CLEAR This button deletes the contents of the selected memory After you press ENTER the 01V96i displays a confir mation window To execute the delete operation move the cursor to the YES button in the confirmation window then press ENTER Note If you select a memory that already contains settings and execute the delete operation the settings will be lost Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important set tings 01V96i Reference Manual Using Libraries 75 Using Libraries Channel Library Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel and Output Channel parameter settings The library contains two preset memories and 127 user readable amp writable memories You can recall only the settings for the currently selecte
104. cutoff frequency EARLY REF One input two output early reflections Type of early reflection simula TYPE dom Revers Plate Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay character EMENESS istics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins Reflection diffusion left right 0 10 reflection spread THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency High pass filter cutoff frequency GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE One input two output early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate TYPE Type A Type B Ms of early reflection simula ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay character INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins Reflection diffusion left right 0 10 reflection spread DENSITY 0 100 Reflection density HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio ER NUM Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain THRU l LN 212 Hz 8 00 High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency MONO DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay DELAY 0 0 2730 0 m Feedback gain plus values for E normal phase feedback minus 221029 values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio High pass filter cutoff frequency
105. for the cur rently selected Stereo Out or Bus Out on the View Parameter and Fader pages Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View Parameter page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired bus then press the DIS PLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F1 button Initial Data 11511251135114 BU1 BUS1 FEN HSERT mi ome LOH L HMID HIGH THRES RATIO L SHELF re OG 125 1 10 0k MM cuo Sams 2z8ms 8 8 08 0 0 0 Pd ES EN 3 G GdB 2 ide The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except for the fol lowing items TheStereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 Parameter pages not contain the Gate and Phase parameters TheStereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair parameter 01 V96i Reference Manual sjno sng 32 Bus Outs Viewing Faders and Other Parameters To display the View Fader page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired bus then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F2 button The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 are slightly different Stereo Out Fader page Initial Data 5 11 5112 51 3 2114 00 amp LIBRHEV 116 AUX ERIS A 1 BAL This control adjusts the level balance betwe
106. gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values and can be increased by up to 18 dB OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes THRESHOLD dB 54 0 to 0 0 541 points deep Me the level at which compression is 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 15 points This determines the amount of compression This determines how soon the signal is com ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points pressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively The value is expressed as 96kHz BINS eet NSEC the duration required for the level to change by 160 points 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 18 0 to 0 0 180 points This sets the compander s output signal level This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied The expander is acti vated when the level drops below the threshold and width 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec RELEASE ms 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec WIDTH dB 0 90 91 points 01 V96i Reference Manual 5151 xipueddy 156 Appendix MIDI Appendix MIDI Scene Memory to Program Change Table Program Initial Change Scene
107. is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Patch data System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96i Patch data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Setup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96i Setup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data 2 8 3 7 Parameter request STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 11110000 01000011 0011 00111110 00011010 00000011 lillOlll FO 43 3n 3E lA 03 ee pp F7 2 8 3 8 Parameter change STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 2 8 3 9 Parameter request STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011010 00000100 0eeeeeee 11110111 11110000 01000011 0011 00111110 00011010 00000100 FO 43 1 1 04
108. m m m m m m 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 J m m m gt gt gt RM10 XG10 XG CH10 VOL amp PAN gt m 2 01V96i Reference Manual User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 131 Bank 4 Nuendo VST Mixer Name O Mig VST MIXER CH1 VST MIXER CH2 RMO3 CH3 VST MIXER CH3 VST MIXER 4 VST MIXER CH5 VST MIXER CH6 VST MIXER CH7 VST MIXER CH8 VST MIXER CH9 VST MIXER CH10 VST MIXER CH11 VST MIXER CH12 VST MIXER CH13 VST MIXER CH14 VST MIXER CH16 Data Format 40 ew polo Sw rao enol 22 2 2 2 12121 JON e 8 END e eet omm cum Je iP ear RE mo ter o 2 2 21212 2121 TSW ri FADER oe Ee Toe ow 20 a ot dois ned ame FADER _ 97 END ee Ee 0 eed ow 730 e a fa ES ES
109. mitted with the device number set to Tx CH STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001 1n 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call 0100 title Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA Oddddddd dd title 1 Oddddddd dd title x depend on the library EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number size SCENE LIB TITLE 0x40 0 99 256 0 response only 16 EQ LIB TITLE 0x41 1 200 1 40 response only 16 GATE LIB TITLE 0x42 1 128 1 4 response only 16 COMP LIB TITLE 0x43 1 128 1 36 response only 16 EFF LIB TITLE 0x44 1 128 1 xx 1 response only 16 CHANNEL LIB TITLE 0x46 0 128 0 response only 16 INPATCH LIB TITLE 0x47 0 32 0 response only 16 OUTPATCH LIB TITLE 0x48 0 32 0 response only 16 1 Varies with the firmware version 2 8 3 12 Parameter request Function call title Reception When this is received a parameter change will be transmitted with the device number set to Rx CH Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011 3n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive messa
110. on patching sig nals to the OMNI OUT connectors e STEREO OUT connectors L R These balanced XLR 3 32 type connectors output the Stereo Out signals The nominal output level is 4 dB STEREO OUT 4dB BAL e 2TR OUT connectors These unbalanced RCA phono con nectors output line level signals to a connected recorder or other external device These connectors always out OUT put the Stereo Out signals 2T 10dBV UNBAL Digital Inputs amp Outputs The 01V96i rear panel features digital input and output nectors that enable you to connect external digital devices Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and outputs You can also add analog and digital I Os by installing an optional I O card in the slot Digital 1 Connectors 2TRIN DIGITAL connector 2TRIN DIGITAL is an RCA phono connector and accepts consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio You can patch digital signals input at this connector to any Input Channel 9 AXIAL page 43 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 OUT DIGITAL connector This RCA phono connector outputs con sumer format IEC 60958 digital audio You can patch any Bus outs or Input channel Direct Outs to this output page 45 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL ADAT IN connector This TOSLINK connector accepts 8 channel ADAT opti cal format signals which can be patched to any Input Channel page 43 OUT connector T
111. or off using the corresponding ON 1 8 buttons EQ settings To control Aux Out 1 8 EQ parameters select the desired Aux Out 1 8 using the corresponding SEL button or fader then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHAN NEL section The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 21 Setting Aux Send Levels You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Out 1 8 Setting Send Levels from the Display You can view multiple channels Aux Send levels on the screen and adjust them individually 1 Press the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 but tons to select the Aux 2 Make sure that the 01V96i displays the Aux Send page This page enables you to adjust the level of the signals routed from each Input Channel to the Aux selected in Step 1 If the Send page is not displayed repeatedly press the but ton that you pressed in Step 1 until the Send page appears Initial Data mier 112 STIS 5114 EDIT 45 ALL HOM Hoo FIXED VARIABLE GLOBAL e Aux Send rotary controls These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input Channels The current numeric levels appear below the rotary controls PRE POST These buttons enable you to specify the Aux signal source points The PRE buttons send pre fader signals and the POST buttons send post fader signals e MODE Aux Sends have two operat
112. page 44 111 UE SR ps 10 Patch USB OUT page 45 E OMNI OUT connectors 10 13 Power section 11 PATCH button 202 8 43 ON DUtLODS 7 8 SLOT section 11 Patch Confirmation preference 109 OH dM 143 Patchin 43 RECA EE Dutton note tite 9 Other Turm OT 109 A Recall Confirmation preference 109 2TR digital outputs 45 N 109 Recall safe function 72 OUT connector 44 pateh 44 RECORDING 49 155 Difect outs rreme ee 46 Initial settings iue rris 127 m M 43 Remote 83 Parameters 125 Ln REC M dU M MU FRAMES 99 Insert In amc 48 Output patch library 76 47 Insert display mode 85 Output SeCHON 13 P EM ee ee S LOCATE TIME section 98 OMNI OUT connector 44 Output patching 44 s P TO HOST USB channels 43 Bs PAD switches 7 12 PEAK indicators 75 We ks ate eng teen Pree NONI PANE Pair Confirmation preference
113. section 7 DIO Setup Surr Bus page 54 Auto WORD CLOCK Display CHORUS deeem 134 DIO Setup Word Clock page H prel Tente 45 109 CLEAR button DIO SETUP button 8 AUX I AUX 8 buttons 8 Comp260 Comp260S 142 Direct 46 36 Compressor library 79 Display 9 Aux send 38 39 41 80 DISPLAY ACCESS section 8 38 Compressors PICS E Attenuating 36 Compressor link 59 Display section 9 Comp settings 37 M 6 DISE 2 DELAY 4 4407 140 Copying channel fader positions Contrast control 9 D 136 uL 42 Control changes 100 104 DUBIE serene ttd RD Delaying 37 1 6 56 EO SMDS 37 38 aput SEcUOR 7 DOUBLE CHANNEL 16 Fixed Mode 39 Channel strip section E Panning 41 Data entry section 9 Dual Phaser 145 DISPLAY ACCESS section 8 DUAL PITCH
114. specify Short names in center column CD and Long full names in the right column 2 When the Name Input Auto Copy check box 3 is on the first four characters of a newly entered Long name automatically copied to the Short name On the other hand a newly entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name You can reset all bus names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then press ing ENTER 2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change then press ENTER The Title Edit window appears which enables you to edit the name TITLE EDIT 3 Edit the name move the cursor to the OK but ton then press ENTER The new name is now effective Tip The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 35 01 V96i Reference Manual sjno sng 36 Aux Outs Aux Outs This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 The Aux Out 1 8 section mixes signals routed from the Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Sends processes them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the specified internal effects processors output connectors or I O card connectors The 01V96i features eight Aux Sends which can be used to send signals to the internal and external effects processors and monitors The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1 8 signal flow Gain Redu
115. that classic rock snare drum sound Emphasizes the attack of tom toms and creates a long leathery decay 5 cymbal Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals extending the sparking decay Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high range of instruments such as shakers cabasas and con Percussion gas S Bass1 Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very Tow 11 Syn Bass Ueonssmhbeswihemphwkedkwunge OOOO Pano 1 Nokes panossoundbrghtes Makes pianos sound brighter Used in conjunction with a compressor this preset emphasizes the attack and low range of pianos E G Clean Use for line level recording of an electric or semi acoustic guitar to get a slightly harder sound Use with trumpets trombones or saxes When used with a single instrument try adjusting the HIGH 24 Brass Sec or HIGH MID frequency Male Vocal 1 for male vocals Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH MID parameters according to the 01V96i Reference Manual 82 Libraries Preset Nome esi Male Vocal 2 variation on preset 25 Female Vo 1 2 for female vocals Try adjusting HIGH HIGH MID parameters according to 8 01V96i Reference Manual Remote Control 83 Remote Control This chapter describes the Remote function which enables you to control external equipment directly from the 01V96i top panel About Remote Function The 01 9615 Remote function enable
116. that is linked to each scene When you store a scene the number of the input patch that was most recently recalled or stored will automatically be linked with that scene When you recall that scene this library number will also be automatically recalled You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers PATCH LINK OUTPUT This indicates the Output Patch library number that is linked to each scene When you store a scene the number of the output patch that was most recently recalled or stored will automatically be linked with that scene When you recall that scene this library number will also be automatically recalled You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers Auto Scene Memory Update If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup page see page 109 is turned on parameter edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory which is available for each Scene This is called the Auto Update function If the Auto Update function is enabled parameter edits made after the Scene was recalled are stored in the Scenes Shadow memory When you again recall the Scene the contents ofthe Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately Therefore even after you recall the Original Scene mem you can recall the edited version from Shadow mem ory to restore the most recent edits If the EDIT indicator appears at the top of the display t
117. the EQ In Att page EU Initial Data meri 5712 5713 5714 CHi CH1 INPUT ATTENUATOR iL 1R TEE HdE zL gt SEC BdB HdE T a m in dE 4L 4R BdB HdE O BdB dE 25 CIC BOB HdE 51 SEC Ade I E Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the amount of attenua tion in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB Tip You can also set the attenuation amount in dB for the cur rently selected channel on the EQ EQ Edit page Setting the Input Channels from the Display 21 EQ ing Input Channels The 01V96i Input Channels feature 4 band LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH parametric EQ The LOW MID and HIGH MID bands are a peaking type of EQ The LOW and HIGH bands can be set to shelving peaking or HPF and LPF respectively 1 Press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust EQ 2 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCEESS EO button then press the F1 button to display the EQ EQ Edit page 11 Data 5 5 G G 0 CURVE 5114 The parameters on this page are described below 1 EQ The ON OFF button turns currently selected Input Channels EQ on or off You can press the ENTER but ton to turn the EQ on or off aslong as the cursor is located on any parameter other than T
118. the same as for Input Channels see page 21 Note that the Stereo Out does not feature the STEREO LINK parameter Routing Bus Out 1 8 Signals to the Stereo Bus You can patch Bus Out 1 8 signals to Outputs and Slot as well as to the Stereo Bus You can adjust the level and pan settings of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus This is convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs 1 8 as a Group Bus To patch the Bus Out 1 8 signals to the Stereo Bus press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly to display the Pan Route Bus to St page ROUTE BUS 1 BUS1 00 BUS1 BUSZ BUSS BUSS 6156 BUST BUSS PAN PAN PAN w CENTER CENTER CEHTER CENTER CENTER CEHTER CENTER 8 8 Move cursor to desired parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the setting Initial Data 1 5112 5113 2114 EXE GH B a a BUS ST 1 ST These controls pan Bus Out 1 8 signals between left and right Stereo Out buses 2 TO ST ON OFF These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1 8 to the Ste reo Bus routing 3 TO ST Faders These faders set the Bus Out 1 8 to Stereo Bus levels Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus Out Settings You can view and adjust parameter settings
119. the signal levels that are displayed in the Meter page For more information on selecting the metering position refer to Viewing the Level Meters in the Owner s Man ual booklet ST IN Channels 1 4 These stereo channels enable you to process stereo signals using the phase effect attenuator and EQ The following dia gram illustrates the ST IN Channel 1 4 signal flow 5 8053 54 BUS 8056 8057 8058 STEREOL STEREOR SOLOL ST IN 1 4 S o METER soi METER PAN 5 To ON LEVEL 2 x PAN C 4BAND o y EQ 1 9 bd Stereo Configuration H D gt LFE x ES PRE POST AUX 1 9 040 lt lt ST IN Channels 1 4 feature following parameters Phase ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer ON On Off e LEVEL e PAN AUX Aux Send level METER For more information on each parameter refer to the preced ing section Input Channel 1 32 Tip You can store these channel parameter settings in the Chan nel library You can also store the Gate Compressor and EQ parameter settings to the corresponding libraries 01V96i Reference Manual sjouueu andu 18 Input Channels Setting the Input Channels from the Display To set the Inp
120. you to store and recall EQ settings for EQ type TYPE I or II Input Channels Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user read 2 able amp writable memories This graph displays the current EQ curve Follow the steps below to use the EQ library 3 Level meters These meters indicate the post EQ levels of the cur 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then rently selected channel and its available pair partner press the F2 button Type amp Curve section The EQ EQ Library page appears The type and curve of the currently selected EQ program are displayed here 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then Se press the SEL buttons to select channels CURRENT CURVE 0000040 You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or CORRENTE B EE recall the EQ library memories to channels For details twee 1 storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 74 TOO O LIBRARY TITLE Cymbal The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ Tom tom 5 Drum 2 ibrary Snare Drum 1 Bass Drum 2 Preset Name Description Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the beater Creates a peak around 80 Hz producing a tight stiff sound Emphasizes snappy and rimshot sounds Emphasizes various ranges for
121. z AGG IMPUT A i B i c i i E i F i amp i oH 8 1 BUS1 8 These parameters enable you to the Fade Time for each Bus Out 1 8 in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 sec onds 2 AUX1 8 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux Outs 1 8 3 STEREO This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the Stereo Out 4 INPUT MASTER A H These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Input Fader Group Master 5 OUTPUT MASTER These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Output Fader Group Master Q T Tip You can copy the currently selected Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Output Channels by double clicking the ENTER button 01V96i Reference Manual 2 Scene Memories Recalling Scenes Safely When a Scene is recalled all mix parameters are set accord ingly However in some situations you can retain the cur rent settings of certain parameters on certain channels by using the Recall Safe function You can set the Recall Safe function parameters for each Scene individually or for all Scenes globally To set the Recall Safe function press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Rcl Safe page appears SCENE Initial Data En 5113 5114 CO CJ Global Recall Safe 1
122. 0 00100000 20 7 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000111 47 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 351 Channel current data DATA NAME BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds GATE Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 20 Gate library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n20 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7 Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C 71 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000111 47 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 GATE Library 1 128 Ommmmmmm mi 256 351 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA DATA NAME 2 8 2 21 Effect library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 1 127 Library no 128 256 EFFECTI 259 EFFECT4 8192 UN DO 256 259 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer For reception by 01V96i only the user area is valid xx 1
123. 00 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 MOTE DENN to determine FREQ 1 FAP B UIS diid Je d ded 3 High pass filter cutoff frequency Low pass filter cutoff frequency FB GAIN 99 to 99 REV SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel row __ m _ THRU MN 21 2 Hz58 00 kiz I Pass Ier euron mequency uto 20 0 Hz 16 0 kHz CEN Reverb and symphonic balance REV SYM 0 100 0 reverb 100 symphonic Fea 005 4000H Modulation speed FAP diid ja d ded d Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV gt SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in series 0 3 99 0 5 Reverb time _______ time bm em sed eee THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz pe 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Reverb symphonic reverb REV BAL 0 100 balance 0 all symphonic reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 005 4000 Modulation speed A d ded d 5 High pass filter cutoff frequency Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV gt PAN One input two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel
124. 000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA 01001110 4E Ommmmmmm mh m 0O SLOT 1 Ommmmmmm ml EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 PARAMETER CHANGE 2 8 3 1 Basic behavior Reception If Parameter change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed If Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Number included in the SUB STATUS these messages are received A specific parameter is controlled when a Parameter Change is received When a Parameter Request is received the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change with the Device Number set to Rx CH Transmission If Parameter change TX is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control Change transmission is not enabled a parameter change will be transmitted with Tx CH as the Device Number As a response to a Parameter Request a parameter change will be transmitted with Rx CH as the Device Number 2 8 3 1 1 Parameter change basic format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011010 FO 43 1 tt ee pp F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96i Data type
125. 0100 14 Function call 0010 2 link Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 18 Parameter change Function call pair copy Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received pairing will be enabled disabled for the specified channel STATUS ID No SUB STATUS 0001 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 2 8 3 20 Parameter change Sort Table When scene memory sort is executed on the 01V96i the memory sort table will be transmitted to Studio Manager Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort it will transmit this data to 01V96i STATUS 11110000 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 11 0 15 Device Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00011010 1 01 961 ADDRESS 00010011 13 Library sort table Of Library type DATA Oddddddd ds Data Oddddddd de Data 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 8 7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk 01V96i Reference Manual
126. 1 96 supports the following MIDI messages Each of these MIDI messages can be individually turned on or off for transmission and reception Program Changes If you assign the 01V96i s Scenes to Program Change numbers the 01V96i transmits Program Changes when it recalls Scenes Also the 01V96i will switch Scenes when it receives Program Changes Control Changes If you assign the 01V96i s parameters to Control Change numbers the 01V96i transmits the assigned Control Changes when the parameter values change Also the 01V96i changes certain parameter values when it receives the corresponding Control Changes System Exclusive Messages The 01V96i transmits System Exclusive Parameter Changes in real time when the parameter values change Also the 01V96i notifies certain parameter values when it receives assigned Parameter Changes MMC MIDI Machine Control MMC used for external machine control MIDI Note On Off These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect Bulk Dump Messages These messages enable you to store the 01V96i s internal data to a sequencer MIDI filer When the 01V96i receives these messages they overwrite 01V96i data The 01 9 features the following interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data MIDI IN THRU OUT ports These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from standard MIDI devices Each port is a single port inter face that transmits and receives single po
127. 10 00 Adjusts the amount of feedback This parameter is available for certain combinations of MODE COLOR and STAGE It allows you to fine tune the tonal character Selects the type of circuit config 1 2 uration being modeled This will affect the tonal character Specifies the number of stages in STAGE 4 6 8 10 the circuit being modeled This will affect the tonal character 01V96i Reference Manual Effects Parameters 145 Dual Phaser This is a 2 in 2 out phaser that emulates a vintage phaser manufactured during the mid 1970s RATE 1 SYNC Adjusts the modulation rate of 0 067 20 000 Hz LFO1 SHAPE 1 Selects the waveform of LFO1 SYNC Adjusts the modulation rate of RATE 2 0 111 20 000 Hz LFO2 SHAPE 2 Selects the waveform of LFO2 DEPTH 1 00 10 00 Adjusts the depth of modulation FB A B 0 00 10 00 Adjusts the amount of feedback Switches the phaser circuit SW A B ON OFF SWEEP B LFO1 LFO2 Selects the LFO for Phaser B SYNC B NORM REV 8 the LFO phase for Phaser Specifies the way in which the two phasers are connected 1 After mixing the stereo input the sound processed by Phaser A is output from the left channel and the sound processed by Phaser B is output from the right channel 2 After mixing the stereo input the sound processed by Phaser A is output from the left channel and the sound processed by 1234 Phaser A and then additionally processed by Phaser i
128. 110111 F7 End ofexclusive 01 V96i Reference Manual YAMAHA Digital Mixing Console Internal Parameters Date 26 Aug 2011 Model 01V96i MIDI Implementation Chart version 1 0 Basic Default 1 16 1 16 NT Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Default OMNI off OMNI Messages Memorized Altered KKK KKK KKK KKK KK X X 0 127 True Voice kkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk X X X Note On Note Off Effect Control X X X X 1 2 0 95 102 119 Assignable Change 0 127 0 127 Velocity X X System X X Common X X System Clock Real Time Commands Effect Control Local ON OFF Aux 11 Notes OFF Messages Active Sense Reset MTC quarter frame message is recognized 1 Bulk Dump Request Parameter Change Request and MMC For MIDI Remote ALL messages can be transmitted Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X NO YAMAHA Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site http www yamahaproaudio com Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual C S G Pro Audio Division 2011 Yamaha Corporation 110
129. 1125113 sre CH1 CH EDIT EFFECT Equa 1 TYFE EGUAL ZERG zIH z a T LIBRARY PATCH HIx BALANCE MIDI MIDI HID1 G SH RITU 4 i 400 Hz E 3 848 gne F G SH 1 12 4 498 On Es HIDS G SH 1 58 Z 5BkHzi 3 896 MID4 HID4 G i MID4 5H 1 58 5 BBkHz w 3 096 Fxi EDIT f 2 EDIT f 3 EDIT f rxd EDIT About Plug Ins If you installed a mini YGDAI card that supports the Effects function into Slot you can use plug in effects in addition to the internal effects processors You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug in input The plug in output can be patched to Input Channels or channel insert ins To use the plug in effects press the EFFECT button repeat edly until the Effect P In Edit page appears For details on using plug ins refer to the owner s manual that came with the plug in card EFFECT Initial Data m cuc eL EDIT ER Software Wersions Hardware Reuizion d 01 V96i Reference Manual JeuJe1u 68 Scene Memories Scene Memories This chapter describes Scene memories which store 01V96i mix and effects settings About Scene Memories Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of 01V96i channel mix settings and internal effects processor s
130. 15 NO ASIN iR 6 SURROUND te 8 SURROUND 9 SURROUND IR nossen sd 726 nossen 7 nossen NOASSIGN 30 32 NowSeN FR FR FR dS Initial Parameter to Control Change Table mon ma iw NOASSIGN NOASSIGN 62 NOASSIGN 6 NOASSIGN 1 SS 66 SURROUND WIDTH INPUTS 68 SURROUND WIDTH INPUTS 69 SURROUND WIDTH 80 SURROUND WIDTH INPUTI7 86 SURROUND WIDTH INPUTZS3 8 NOASIN 89 SURROUND DEPTH 90 SURROUND DEPTH INPUTZ NOASSIGN J o o 01 V96i Reference Manual 171 xipueddy 172 Appendix MIDI CHANNEL16 S NO ASSICN 1 SURROUND IR 9012 2 SURROUND ir 76 SURROUND IR 78 SURROUND IR INPUTS2 9 IR 7 NoassicN 19 nossen 1 79 NOASSIGN 3 nossen 22 nossen 3 nossen 3 nossen 1 33 nossen 726 nossen 27
131. 16 source selector is turned p s on pushed in signals from INPUT 15 and 16 are ignored Instead signals from the 2TR IN connector will be routed to AD Input Chan nels 15 and 16 Tip You can patch signals input from the INPUT connectors to any Input Channels See page 43 for information on patching input signals to Input Channels e INSERT I O connectors INSERT on These TRS type phone connectors lt 9 INSERT are used to insert external devices such as effects processors into AD Input Channels INSERT e Phantom Power PHANTOM 48 H9 12 CH5 8 CH1 4 Inputs 1 thr ough on on orr on 12 feature switch able 48V phantom powering for use with con denser type microphones and direct boxes The phantom 48V switches on the rear panel turn on or off 48V phantom power feed to the corresponding inputs PAD switches Inputs 1 through 12 feature pad switches which attenuate input signals by 20 dB These switches are effective on both INPUT A and signals GAIN controls E Inputs 1 through 16 feature rotary gain controls that adjust input sensitivity Input sensitivity GAIN for INPUT connectors 1 12 ranges from 16 dB to 60 dB when Pad is off and from 4 dB to 40 dB when Pad is on Input sensitiv ity for INPUT connectors 13 16 ranges from 4 dB to 26 dB PEAK The SIGNAL indicator lights up g SIGNAL when the in
132. 2 ES 9 5 6 7 8 enoue r5 5 Faner Es Ez E Es Faves our zs 58 OTHERS ae E 5 STEREO A IH FADE M OUT FADE ACL SAFE 1 Global Recall Safe When this check box is checked Recall Safe settings stored in Scene memories are ignored and the current set tings are retained 2 SAFE This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe func tion 3 MODE The following MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters will remain unaffected by Scene recalls The MODE buttons correspond to the following parameters parameters Channel faders or level controls e OWN Channel On Off parameters 6 Channel parameters Stereo Out balance Channel EQ parameters Channel Comp parameters Channel Gate parameters AUN Channel Aux Send levels Pre Post AUX Aux Send On Off parameters Channel Delay parameters ROUTING Channel Routing parameters Tip The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other but tons 4 RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section This section enables you to select which channels will remain unaffected by Scene recalls
133. 27 256 259 8192 xx varies with the firmware version STATUS ID No SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 COUNT LOW 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA ccccocoo cL 01001100 4C 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000101 45 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Effect Library no 1 128 DATA NAME Ommmmmmm 111 256 259 1 4 current BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds Effect Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM Oeeeeeee ee ee Invert L tde 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 22 Effect library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS ID No SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000101 45 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Effect Library no 1 128 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA DATA NAME Ommmmmmm ml 25
134. 3 On el 4 40 20 20 38 43 ag 33 4C 00 bb tt bb ds de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl b 0 3 bank no 1 4 total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number User define layer data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 6 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01001100 00000000 Obbbbbbb 11110111 FO 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 4C 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump b 0 3 bank no 1 4 End of exclusive 2 8 2 7 User Defined Keys bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will in some cases change if the same bank is being used STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 ccccecc 01001100 01001101 FO 43 On cl 4C 4D System exclusive message
135. 6 NOASSIGN INPUIS 6 to rmon INPUTI7 86 INPUTS 8 NOASIGN 8 90 NPUIZ NOASSIGN 01 V96i Reference Manual 165 xipueddy 166 Appendix MIDI CHANNEL10 NO ASSICN 2 tQ 6 tQ 8 tQ GHIGHH NNPUIS3 9 tQ STINT 4 7 nossen 1 nossen 1 nossen nossen 1 29 3 2 nossen 3 nossen 3 nossen 33 nossen 726 nossen 27 NN NOASSIGN 39 NOASSIGN 1 Noassicn 45 46 nossen a nossen 48 nossen 49 nossen 30 NOASIN S2 NOMSEN nossen 4 nossen 55 nossen 56 nossen
136. 6 0 sec 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec DECAY ms 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec 96kHz 3 ms 21 1 sec 160 points This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB Characteristics Time Series Analysis Input Signal Output Signal 5 HOLD THRESHOLD ATTACK DECAY 22 gt 5 T2 5 5 9 THRESHOLD z RANGE Input Level Time Time 01V96i Reference Manual 5151 xipuaddy 152 Appendix Parameter Lists DUCKING Ducking is commonly used for voice over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD the output level is attenuated by a specified amount RANGE 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec 48kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 This determines how long ducking remains active HOLD ms 88 2kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 sec once the trigger signal has fallen below the 96kHz 0 01 ms 981 ms THRESHOLD level 160 points 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec Sins 3 set This determines how soon ducker returns to its DECAY ms 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the CE duration re
137. 6 259 1 4 current EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 23 Channel library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 0 Library no 0 128 Library no 128 256 1 287 CH32 288 STEREO 1L 295 5 4R 384 BUSI 391 BUS8 512 AUXI 519 AUX8 768 STEREO 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96i only the user area is valid 2 128 256 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count 128 cl COUNT LOW 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA cecococoo 01001100 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01 V96i Reference Manual MIDI Data Format 179 DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM 01000011 00111001 00110011 01001000 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ottttttt Obbbbbbb 11110111 43 39 33 48 mh ml tt bb ds de ee F7 0 128 Channel Library no 0 128 256 Current data total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Channel Library data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 24 Channel library bulk dump request for
138. 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 418 0 180 points This sets the compressor s output signal level This determines how compression is applied at the threshold For higher knee settings compression is pelis applied gradually as the signal exceeds the speci fied threshold creating a more natural sound I O Characteristics Time Series Analysis 1 OUT GAIN 0 0dB Input signal Output Signal THRESHOLD 5 2 ATTACK RELEASE kl 3 RATIO E 3 1 5 2 TTE ME 7 9 THRESHOLD P NE Input Level Time Time 01 V96i Reference Manual 5151 xipueddy 154 Appendix Parameter Lists EXPAND An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO Parameter Description THRESHOLD dB 54 0 to 0 0 541 points ia of input signal required to 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 0 1 RATIO 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 This determines the amount of expansion 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 00 1 16 points This determines how soon the expander returns to ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold ee ee This determines how soon the signal is expanded 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec RELEASE ms 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec once the signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for
139. 8 AUX1 8 STEREO ATTACK INPUT1 BUS1 8 oN ON ATTACK 32 ST IN1 4 PHASE CHANNEL INPUT1 32 ST INTL 4R THRESH H CHANNEL 1 32 THRESH MASTER BUS1 8 AUXT1 8 STEREO RELEASE H INSERT ON PRE POST IN DELAY OUT DELAY INPUTI BUS1 8 INPUT1 AUX5 6 AUX7 8 BUS TO ST INPUT1 32 LFEH LFEL DIV F DIV R SURROUND 32 ST INT 4 1 32 1 32 051 8 0 1 8 5 1 32 5 INTL 4R BUS1 8 BALANCE MASTER STEREO OFS LR OFS FR EFFECT PARAM1 L PARAM 32 H 1 8 5 L R 32 ST IN 1 4 BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO INPUT1 32 ST INTL 4R EFFECT1 4 01 V96i Reference Manual ICHIA 106 Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128 steps such as Fader and Delay Time parameters require two or more Control Change messages to specify the val ues For example if you wish to control Fader parameters on certain channels using Control Changes you must assign the same channel to two Control Change numbers and select FADER and FADER for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the first PARAME TER column LHPBPIRELC suse PAGER SBRBREL TROT TL 15 13 H CHANNEL INFUT 1 13 HO ASSIGN If you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain channels using Control Changes you must assign the same channel Delay para
140. 91227 EQ EQ Library page 81 EQ Out Att page 30 36 BO DUTOR ee 8 ern eer res 81 PIOSeb Dt dt 8l EO Ins e oed 59 t 143 EUR qt 56 EESEA odis 9 59 FADER MODE section 8 PAGING 71 ALLCDEAR gee 71 PG et ect Eod 71 BUS HB esiste 71 Global fade time 71 INPUT CHI 2 71 SFIN a u A 71 STEREO couette hse 71 TAS oe ut 56 Fast Meter Fall Time preference 109 FEGAIN osani 19 Fixed 39 41 PEANGE c ane 134 GATE REVERB etaed KEYIN SOURCE Higher sampling rates HIGH MID button HOME button HORIZONTAL Initial Data Nominal preference Input channels Setting from the control surface 25 Setting from the display Switching the signal phase Viewing the settings INPUT connectors Input patch library Input sensitivity GAIN controls INSERT I O connectors Insert patching Internal effects Effects processors 1 4 Inserting into channels KEVIN SOURCE 19 L LAS TSOL s b etas atre 50 etd 97 LAYBRSeCUOD eiecit 8 Layers Initial bank settings 128 LEARN DUtOD 3 usce oett ste 96 Level controls ne
141. AY ACCESS DYNAMICS but ton then press the F2 button The Dynamics Gate Lib page appears Initial lata IP STI1 ST 2 STI3 ST 14 100 5 U S CURRENT CURVE 0 LIBRARY TITLE lt SH H BD luck 1 CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently selected channel gate type Gate or Ducking 2 CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current channel gate curve 3 GR meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the gate and the post gate levels of the cur rently selected channel and its available pair partner 4 Type amp Curve section The type Gate or Ducking and curve of the cur rently selected memory is displayed here Tip If you selected an ST IN Channel 1 4 Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 or Stereo Out that does not feature a gate the 01V96i indicates XXX has no Gate in which XXX repre sents a channel name 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels You can now store the selected channel gate settings or recall the gate library memories to channels For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 74 The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate library No PresetName Description DUCKING Ducking template 3 A Dr BD GATE
142. Aux 1 8 in most cases You can patch a different signal to the other input of 2 in 2 out effect programs Tip You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs e Move the cursor to an IN parameter box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears This window enables you to select the input source quickly 4 To patch a signal output from the effects pro cessor move the cursor to the desired OUT parameter box select the signal destination from the following options then press ENTER No assignment c Input Channels 1 32 STIN IL ST IN AR ST IN Channels 1L 4R INS 1 32 Input Channel Insert In INS BUSI 8 Bus 1 8 Insert In INS 8 Aux 1 8 Insert In INS ST L amp INS ST R Stereo Bus Insert In To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends select CH 1 32 or ST IN 1 4 in most cases The chan nels you assign here will become the effects return chan nels You can patch a different channel to the other output of a 1 in 2 out or 2 in 2 out effect program to create stereo effects Tip Ifyou select an ST IN Channel as the destination you can patch the L and R channel signals separately You also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT parameter boxes as explained in Step 3 e The number of inputs available for each effect vari
143. B STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011010 00000010 11110000 01000011 0011 00111110 00011010 00000010 11110111 FO 43 in 3E 1A 02 ee FO 43 3n 3E 1A 02 F7 2 8 3 6 Parameter change STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0001 GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 00011010 ADDRESS 00000011 cccoocc DATA FO 43 1 03 buffer System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Edit Buffer Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Edit buffer System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Edit Buffer Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Patch data System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96i Patch data Element no If ee
144. DUAL M In Individual mode paired Input Chan nel pan controls operate independently e GANG M In Gang mode paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison main a 215 214 taining the current pan range INV GANG Dow z In Inverse Gang mode paired Input 572 Channel pan controls operate in unison but move in opposite directions Tip You can adjust the pan setting for the ST IN Channels L R sep arately Youcan also adjust the pan setting for the Input Channels using the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Surround is available when the 01V96i is in Surround mode See page 52 for more information on Surround Pan Routing Input Channels You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus Bus 1 8 or its own Direct Out With the default setting signals are routed only to the Stereo Bus However you can patch signals to a single or multiple destinations if necessary 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears ROUTI 16 page This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 1 16 e ROUT17 ST1 page This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 17 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same PAH ROUTE Initial Data mr 12 113
145. Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data LIILIILIILIILII Ll The Output Patch preset memory 0 contains the following settings Slot output channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 Slot output channels 9 16 Bus Outs 1 8 ADAT OUT channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Aux Outs 1 4 Effects Library The Fffects library enables you to store and recall Effects pro cessor 1 4 programs The library contains 56 preset programs including Add On Effects and 72 user readable amp writable programs Note The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1 4 How ever only Effects processors 1 and 2 enable the recall of Effect 19 HQ Pitch and Effect 42 Freeze To store and recall settings to and from the library you must locate the corresponding Effects page To access the Effects library press the DISPLAY ACCESS EFFECT button repeatedly until the library page for the desired Effects processor appears Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below Internal Effects Processor 1 Library FX1 Lib page Internal Effects Processor 2 Library FX2 Lib page Internal Effects Processor 3 Library FX3 Lib page Internal Effects Processor 4 Library FX4 Lib page 5 11 stile 5113 5114 Ir tilal Data EI G EFFECT Reverb Hall C e
146. EL button in the window then press ENTER Tip To transmit bulk dump request messages move the cur sor to the REQUEST button then press ENTER If you set up the 01V96i so that it will transmit and receive MIDI mes sages to and from another 01V96i the other 01V96i will respond to the bulk dump request and transmit the bulk dump data to the 01V96i you are operating To receive bulk data press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button again to display the MIDI Setup page then turn on the Rx ON OFF button in the BULK row Now when the 01V96i receives bulk data the corre sponding internal data is updated Note Bulk data can be transmitted and received between the 01V96i and the 01V96V2 01V96VCM Compatibility depends on the type of data as follows Data that can be transmitted and received between the 01V96i and the 01V96V2 01V96VCM in either direction SCENE MEM EQ LIBRARY GATE LIBRARY COMP LIBRARY CHANNEL LIBRARY EFFECT LIBRARY BANK SETUP MEMORY PGM TABLE CTL TABLE Data that can be only be transmitted by the 01V96V2 01V96VCM and received by the 01V 961 and not in the other direction INPUT PATCH LIBRARY OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY 01V96i Reference Manual Other Functions 109 Other Functions This chapter describes the 01V96i s miscellaneous functions Setting Preferences You can change the default settings and environmental set tings of the 01V96i by using the DIO
147. ENTER to turn the button Effect insertion is now enabled Tip After inserting effects to channels adjust the MIX BAL ANCE parameter for the effects according to the purpose and effects type Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears which enables you to quickly select available sig nal paths Editing Effects To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects proces sors 1 4 press the DISPLAY ACCESS EFFECT button repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you wish to edit appears Effects processors 1 4 correspond to the following pages Effects Processor 1 FX Edit page Effects Processor 2 FX2 Edit page Effects Processor 3 FX3 Edit page Effects Processor 4 Edit page These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters 121 871257135714 cue an meam G 0 EFFECT NAME DELR TIRZZGUT LIBRARY E 45 BALANCE TEMPO MIDI ELE LML 4 LEXEASSJ 120 TEMPO DELAY Fa FB GRIF 2 AG LFF Po SYNE NOTE hru 18 Bk Iz DFF Eq LXI EDIT fg Fx4 EDIT fibi EDIT Fxz EDI
148. ER MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the 01V96i will be assigned to the DATA parameter boxes in the ON section Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot switch The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA parameter box MIDI messages are described below 00 7F MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal END This message indicates the end of MIDI messages Subse quent messages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes will be ignored This message indicates that no messages are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes Tip When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI mes sages the 01V96i automatically recognizes the end of the messages and assigns END and While continuing to hold down the foot switch turn off the LEARN button Move the cursor to the third parameter box 7F in this example then rotate the Param eter wheel to change the value to SW Etre ete eee eer ere SW is a variable that changes depending on the ON buttons on off status You can use the following variables in MIDI messages SW This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section When the ON buttons are turned on 7F 127 in decimal is output When the ON buttons are turned off 00 0 in decimal is output FAD This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the FADER section When you operate the fad ers
149. FLIT OUTPUT Data ae eae Data Data Data Data Data Data Extra Mix Endi ns Mix off lintro Mix 2 1 H J D B J 3 2 t 3 Rotate Parameter wheel press the INC DEC buttons to select a Scene mem ory move the cursor to one of the following buttons then press ENTER 1 TITLE EDIT Select this button to display the Title Edit window which enables you to edit a selected Scene title 2 RECALL This button recalls the contents of the selected Scene memory 3 STORE This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene memory By default a confirmation window appears before you store the Scene 4 CLEAR This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene memory 5 PROTECT ON OFF This button switches on and off the write protection of the contents of the selected Scene memory A padlock icon M appears next to the title ofa Scene memory that is write protected 6 Library list Scene memories 01 99 are listed in the library memory title list The titles of stored Scenes are indicated in the title column The message No Data appears in the title column of empty library memories The selected mem ory appears inside the dotted box between and 4 marks 01V96i Reference Manual 70 Scene Memories 7 PATCH LINK INPUT This indicates the Input Patch library number
150. FSET and OFFSET parameters an external MIDI device by assigning the surround param eters to MIDI Control Changes see page 104 6 To link the surround pan settings of two chan nels displayed on the page turn on the ST LINK button Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK button to specify how you want the linked surround pan Ed Ed 136 F12 8 8 R 44 F16 120 F16 The sound image moves from front right to rear left With this pattern you can also fine tune the to move trajectory using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET The following table shows how the sound images on two and OFFSET parameters linked channels move when different trajectory patterns and stereo link patterns are combined A solid line indi cates the movement of the selected channel and a dot ted line indicates the movement of the linked partner Ed L3e 4836 eR3e 12 R 8 8 744 16 eL20 16 v The sound image moves between left and right while tracing an arc With this pattern you can also fine tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameters 140 F48 844 4844 eL20 F32 128 56 132 4 24 The sound image moves between front and rear while tracing an arc With this pattern you can also fine t
151. G f 250 roo Wie jp psu W UJ UJ UJ N __ lt 8 s 8 s s UJ UJ 09 UJ y e e 01 V96i Reference Manual Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 kHz 149 Preset Compressor Threshold dB dB 20 Parameters fs 44 1 kHz A Dr EXPAND pee Threshold dB 8 1 Release ms Attack ms 60 Threshold dB Out gain dB 0 0 Ratio 1 Attack A Dr OverTop COMPAND S Release ms Out gain dB Threshold dB Width dB Ratio 1 Release ms Attack ms Threshold dB Out gain dB Ratio 11 Attack Finger Release ms Out gain dB Threshold 48 Ratio 1 Release ms Compander Attack ms Threshold dB COMPAND H Out dB 0 0 Ratio 1 Width dB 736 Attack m 6 E B Slap COMP Release ms Out gain dB Threshold 8 8 Ratio 1 Release ms Compander Attack ms Threshold dB COMPAND S Out dB 0 0 Ratio 1 Width dB Attack ms _ 9 Syn Bass COMP Release ms Out gain dB Threshold dB 1 Release ms Attack ms 9 Threshold dB 9 Out gain dB Ratio 1 Attack Release ms Out gain dB Threshold dB 1 Release ms Attack ms Threshold dB COMPAND H Out gain dB Ratio 1 Width dB Attack ms COMP Release ms Out gain
152. I Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7 Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 207 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010001 51 0 Ommmmmmm mh 0 199 EQ Library no 1 200 Ommmmmmm 111 256 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 17 Compressor library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 1 127 Library no 128 256 287 CH32 384 BUS1 391 BUS8 512 AUXI 519 AUX8 768 STEREO 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96i only the user area is valid 36 127 256 STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 COUNT LOW GL 01001100 4c 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01011001 59 Y 0 127 COMP Library no 1 128 256 Channel current data total block number minimum number is O Ommmmmmm mh Ommmmmmm ml Ottttttt tt Obbbbbbb bb BLOCK INFO current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds COMP Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM
153. I IN port of the MIDI device MIDI IN Synthesizer 229 oro li um o 01 V96i Reference Manual MIDI Remote Layer 95 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears DIO SETUP Initial lel 8 8 4 o zu al ma HIDI TO HOST SETUP SPECIAL FUNCTIONS PORT Tx PORT Studio Manager DRH 4 HOST MONITOR REMOTE MACHINE 3 Move cursor to the REMOTE parameter box 1 in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI then press ENTER If the MIDI port is already in use a window confirming the assignment change appears Move the cursor to the
154. I POTE SEU 101 Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall 103 Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control 104 Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes 106 Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI Bulk Dump 107 Other FUNCTIONS 109 Aiai tenue dau 109 Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assienable et ae 110 Cascading rotto tovs ed et tos 111 Checking the Battery and the System Version 113 Calibrating the ade ds 113 jr dee 115 Appendix Parameter Lists 119 USER DEFINED 119 USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments 121 Input Patch Parameters tte nad 121 Initial Input Patch Settings vet aoi 123 Output Patch Parameters aai dui pt dte 125 Initial Output Patch Settings onov 127 User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 128 Effects ones ooo etian tab ub A 132 Effects and tempo synchronization 146 Preset Parameters 147 Preset Gate Parameters fs 44 1 kHz eee 148 Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 kHz 149 Dynamics Parameters i ud
155. Je d ded 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Type of early reflection simula tion DELAY gt ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in series Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflected delay balance 096 all early reflected delay 10096 all delay DLY BAL 0 100906 S Hall L Hall Ran dom Revers Plate Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 2 INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms wk ___ Seed Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTEL 1 to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER 1 to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO DIETE to determine FB DLY 1 ffi H3 PTT 5h d ded 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Type of early reflection simula tion 01 V96i Reference Manual 5357 xipueddy 140 Appendix Parameter Lists DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in parallel Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feed
156. Last Solo mode only one channel can be soloed at a time by pressing the SOLO button The Solo function that was previously enabled for channels is automatically cancelled 4 LISTEN This parameter determines the source of the Input Chan nel Solo signal Pre Fader or Post Pan When Pre Fader is selected turning on the PAN button below the Pre Fader option will solo the channel with the pan position speci fied by the Pan setting even if the source precedes the fader This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo mode 5 SOLO TRIM This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo signal in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB 6 FADER SOLO RELEASE If this check box is checked you can unsolo the channels by raising the channel faders that were at the level of oo when the Solo function was turned on If the faders were higher than oo the channels cannot be soloed This setting is not effective in Mixdown Solo mode and for Output Channels Note When you check the FADER SOLO RELEASE check 7 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL For Mixdown Solo mode Input Channels can be config ured individually so that they are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed Solo Safe function Signals from Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL button turned on are always fed to the Stereo bus regard less ofthe channels Solo function status You can clear all Solo Safe settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button Tip For example i
157. Manual Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes 55 Surround Pan Monitoring To monitor surround pan movement patch the Bus Outs to the analog outputs to which a monitoring system is connected The following diagram illustrates an example in which Bus Out 1 2 left and right front channel signals are output from the STE REO OUT L R connectors and Bus Out 3 6 signals are output from the OMNI OUT 1 4 connectors in 5 1 Surround mode 01V96i SURROUND PAN Subwoofer Input Channel 1 SURROUND PAN Input Channel 2 Front L Center Front R SURROUND PAN Input Channel 3 i STEREO OUT L STEREO OUT OMNI OUT 1 OMNI OUT 2 Multi channel amplifier OMNI OUT 3 OMNI OUT 4 Tip To output left and right front signals of the surround channels from the STEREO OUT L R connectors turn on the Surround LR to Stereo checkbox on the Surr Bus page 01V96i Reference Manual punong 56 Surround Surround Panning You can set the surround pan parameters for each Input Channel 1 Make sure that the 01V96i is in any Surround mode except Stereo then press the SEL but ton of the channel for which you want to set surround pan 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Ch Edit page appears The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel and its surround pan setti
158. NOASSIGN 1 Noassicn 2 NOASSIGN 49 nossen 50 NOASSIGN Si nossen S2 Noassicn nossen 4 NOASSIGN ss nossen 56 nossen 57 nossen U S 01 V96i Reference Manual mon ma tow 59 NOASSIGN Pei NoassiGN G NOASSIGN 6 NOASSIGN 66 SURROUND INPUTZ 68 SURROUND DIF INPUTZS 69 SURROUND DIF INPUTSO NOASIN 8 8 NOASSIGN 8 NOASIN NOASSIGN 8 NOASSIGN 86 NOASIN o 8 NOASSIGN 8 NOASIN tQ ____ ms mus STIN2 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN o 9 NOASSIGN J J NOASSIGN o o H6 NOASIN 117 NOASSIGN J J
159. OUT output channels and slot output channels for Input Channels 1 32 2 DIRECT OUT Determines the Direct Out signal source position from the following three options d 5 e Immediately before Input Channel EQ T Immediately before Input Channel fader Boss Immediately after Input Channel fader ez Ti gt d 27 gt 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter 1 32 you want to change then rotate the Param eter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the destination If necessary specify the signal source position using the DIRECT OUT parameter 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Note If you select a destination that is already used by an Output Patch setting and turn on the Direct Out the Output Patch setting will be disabled To restore the Output Patch set ting select another Direct Out destination or turn off the Direct Out A Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until one of the following pages containing the channels you want to patch to the Direct Out appears Rout1 16 page This page enables you to change Input Channel 1 16 routings Rout17 STI page This page enables you to change the Input Channels 17 32 and ST IN Channel 1 4 routings Tip Refer to page 22 for more information on these pages 5 Movethe cursor to the D button for the chan nel you want to patch to
160. Outs CAS ST L CAS ST R CASSOLOL CASSOLOR The following display page is an example of integrating Bus 1 8 Aux Send 1 4 Stereo Bus and Solo Bus signals via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and two 8 chan nel digital I O cards such as 8 Initial Data 501 502 213 2114 EDIT 45 0 E 4 IH MAME IH LIB fa OUT PATCH TO USE Tip Patching may vary depending on the type and number of buses used for the cascade connection Note Since the number of channels available on the digital I O card is limited only Aux Sends 1 4 are cascaded in this example Using a 16 channel digital I O card such as MY16 AT enables you to cascade all buses 5 On the master unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Cascade In page appears 6 Select the Input Channels on the master unit to which the Bus signals are input from the Slave unit The following display page is an example of receiving the slave units Bus 1 8 Aux Send 1 4 Stereo Bus and Solo 01V96i Reference Manual suonounj 19430 112 Other Functions Bus signals via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and two 8 channel digital I O cards such as MY8 AT Initial Data EDIT EZ Ek CEL CASCADE PATCH 5112 113 pu CASCADE BUS 1 Slat CH IH 1 Note sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses on the master unit Incorrect patching will resul
161. PORT TRANSM IT REGLIEST AD MIDI HOST The following parameters are available on this page 1 GENERAL section This section enables you to select ports that transmit and receive MIDI messages such as Program Changes and Control Changes Rx PORT This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data reception In the left parameter box select MIDI USB or SLOT If you select USB or SLOT specify port number 1 8 in the right parameter box Tx PORT This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data transmission The available ports are the same as for the Rx PORT parameter 2 MIDI THRU section These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI data from one port or slot to another without changes Select a port for reception in the first parameter box and select a port for transmission in the next parameter box located to the right of the arrow If you select USB or SLOT specify the port number in the small parameter box adjacent to the port parameter box MONITOR A REMOTE MACHINE MIDI Port Setup 101 3 MACHINE CONTROL section This section enables you to select a remote control method and a remote control port to control external devices that support MMC PORT Select MIDI USB or SLOT for MMC command transfer If you select USB or SLOT specify the port number in the right parameter box DEVICE ID Specify the 01V96is MMC Device ID MMC Devic
162. Reference Manual 5357 xipueddy 142 Appendix Parameter Lists ST REVERB Two input two output stereo reverb REV TIME 03 9903 Hall Room Stage REV TYPE Reverb type INI DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion left right 0 10 reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Balance of early reflections and E R BAL 0 10090 reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections THRU LN 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency M BAND DYNA Two input two output 3 band dynamics processor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band For positive values the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is PRESENCE 10 to 10 increased For negative values the opposite will occur When set to 0 all three bands are affected the same LOOKUP 0 0 100 0 ms Lookup delay CMP BYP OFF ON Compressor bypass L M XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low mid crossover frequency M H XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Mid high crossover frequency SLOPE 6 to 12 dB Filter slope CEILING 6 0 to 0 0 dB Specifies the maximum output OFF level EXP THRE 54 0 to 24 0 dB Expander threshold SOLO LOW OFF ON If this is on only the low fre quency band will
163. S 1 PREFERENCES 2 MIDI TO HOST SETUP MONITOR REMOTE MACHINE CONTROL SURROUND BAS SETUP CASCADE IN ATTENUATION OUTPUT PORT ATTENUATOR MIDI SETUP PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE BULK DUMP OSCILLATOR CHANNEL STATUS MONITOR BATTERY CHECK USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN OPERATION LOCK PHASE INSERT INPUT CH1 16 DELAY INPUT CH17 32 DELAY OUTPUT DELAY PAN INPUT CH1 16 ROUTING INPUT CH1 7 32 ROUTING ST IN BUS TO STEREO SURROUND MODE SELECTED CHANNEL SURROUND EDIT INPUT CH1 16 SURROUND INPUT CH1 7 32 SURROUND STEREO INPUT SURROUND LINK 68 71 71 72 72 73 73 110 49 85 98 54 112 34 101 102 104 107 45 113 119 47 22 31 53 56 58 58 58 BUTTON PAIR GROUP PATCH DYNAMICS EFFECT VIEW FUNCTION INPUT OUTPUT IN FADER IN MUTE OUT FADER OUT MUTE IN EQ OUT EQ IN COMP OUT COMP IN MASTER OUT MASTER IN PATCH INPUT INS EFFECT CASCADE IN IN NAME IN LIB OUT PATCH USB OUT OUTPUT INS DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT OUT NAME OUT LIB GATE EDIT GATE LIB COMP EDIT COMP LIB EQ EDIT EQ LIBRARY IN ATT OUT ATT FX1 EDIT FX2 EDIT FX3 EDIT FX4 EDIT FX1 LIB FX2 LIB FX3 LIB FX4 LIB P IN EDIT PARAMETER FADER LIBRARY 1 16 AUX 17 STI AUX PAGE NAME INPUT PAIR OUTPUT PAIR INPUT FADER GROUP INPUT MUTE GROUP OUTPUT FADER GROUP OUTPUT MUTE GROUP INPUT EQUALIZER LINK OUTPUT EQUALIZER
164. SHUTTLE Switches the Wheel mode to Shuttle DAW SCRUB ao the Wheel mode to Scrub You can audition the pre roll post roll in point area or out point area by holding down the button to DAW AUDITION which this function is assigned and pressing a button to which DAW PRE DAW POST DAW IN or DAW OUT is assigned Plays back from the pre roll point up DAW PRE to the beginning of the selected area Plays back from the beginning of the DAW IN selected area for a duration specified as the pre roll Plays back to the end of the selected DAW OUT area for a duration specified as the post roll Plays back from the end of the DAW POST selected area for a duration specified as the post roll DAW RTZ Moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session DAW END Moves the playback cursor to the end of the session DAW ONLINE Toggles between on line and off line DAW LOOP Toggles Loop Playback on and off Toggles QuickPunch and off Correspond to the Automation Over DAW AUTO write Auto Enable functions PLUGIN DAW AUTO SENDMUTE DAW AUTO READ DAW AUTO TOUCH DAW AUTO LATCH Select Automation modes DAW AUTO WRITE DAW AUTO TRIM DAW AUTO OFF Cancels Automation recording and playback for all channels When Automation is interrupted the LED DAW AUTO SUSPEND flashes and channel strip controls maintain the current settings Displays the channel Automation mode Read Tch Ltch Wrt or Off
165. SIN S2 NOMSEN nossen 4 nossen 55 nossen 56 nossen 57 nossen U S 01 V96i Reference Manual mon ma w 59 possen 8 66 ow NPUIZ __ NPUTZS e now mum 7i tQ FloW NPUIS 76 NOWSEN 7 78 NOWSEN 779 nossen nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 8 nossen 6 nossen 8 nossen 8 NOMSEN 9 tQ mos NPUIZ6 riz CHANNELS mon ma iw CO possen 6
166. SSIGN ooo so NOASSIGN 31 NOANIN 32 NOASSIGN 7 NOASSIGN se NOASSIGN Initial Parameter to Control Change Table mon ma iw NOASSIGN NOASSIGN ooo o G NOASSIGN SS 6 NOASSIGN 66 m INPUTS 6 a HPON 80 tQ ______ ____ 86 tQ 8 O 8 tQ _____ n NOASSIGN J 01V96i Reference Manual 167 xipueddy 168 Appendix MIDI CHANNEL12 High Mid low m ms 6 tQ ATH 7 ATH m 8 tQ 9 tQ m 16 12 AITH 7 Noassicn 20 NOASSIGN 22 33 NOASSIGN A NOASSIGN NOASSIGN 26 NOASSIGN 27 NN NOASSIGN 39 NOASSIGN 1 Noassicn 24 46 ATL 49 NOWSEN 50 NOASIN NOASSIGN S2 Noassicn
167. Setup Prefer1 and Prefer2 pages To locate one ofthe Preferences page press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly Preferl page This page enables you to set the 01V96i so that when you press a button on the top panel the 01 961 displays the cor responding display page and shows or hides confirmation and alarm messages DIO SETUPICY E EXTRA 2712 5713 2714 CH4 CH4 Auto PAN Diselas Auto EQUALIZER Display O Initial Data Nominal O Auto 5010 DisFlay O Scene Auto Urdate O Auto WORD CLOCK Diselas Cascade COMM Link Auto Channel Select Auto Direct Out On 1 Store Confirmation O Routina ST Pair Link El MIDI 0 Recall Confirmation Patch Confirmation Fair Confirmation Hominal Pan Fast Meter Fall Time E 010 PREFERS 2515 This page contains the following parameters These parame ters are explained in the order from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column Auto PAN Display If this check box is on the Pan Route pages appear auto matically when you operate the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section In Stereo Surround mode operating the PAN control enables you to adjust the left and right Pan setting Otherwise it enables you to adjust the Surround Pan settings Auto EQUALIZER Display If this check box is on the EQ EQ Edit page appears automatically when you press an EQ relat
168. T 1 EFFECT NAME This parameter displays the name of the effect program currently used by the effects processor 2 TYPE This parameter displays the type of effect program cur rently used by the effects processor The I O configura tion of the effect program is displayed below this parameter button Move the cursor to this parameter then press ENTER to display the Library page for the selected effects processor button Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the Patch Effect page which enables you to assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects proces sors 1 4 5 MIX BALANCE This parameter knob enables you to set the balance between wet and dry signals When the parameter is set to 096 only the dry signal is heard When set to 10096 only the wet signal is heard Turn on the BYPASS button to bypass the currently selected effects processor 6 TEMPO This section enables you to set the tempo and interval of the selected effects and displays certain parameters only when certain effect types are selected Use the parameter control on the left side of this section to adjust the value between 25 BPM and 300 BPM When the MIDI CLK 01 V96i Reference Manual About Add On Effects 67 button is on 01V96i updates the TEMPO data BPM based on the MIDI Clock information received at the MIDI IN port You can also specify the tempo by moving the cursor to the TAP TEMPO button
169. TRIM SOLO L L SOLOR 4 2TR IN Q RCA 50 010616 MONITOR TRIM NT MONITOR OUT OUTPUT SOLO tai UL DNE 1 2 LEVEL 4 BUS1 8 8 amp _4 L AUXI 8 2 roe o MONITOR OUT teat D 4 1 R LEVEL f PHONES SOLO bus This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the Monitor outputs bypassing Bus 1 8 and the Stereo Bus OUTPUT SOLO This section routes soloed Output Channels Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 to the Monitor outputs Note Input and Output Channels cannot be solo monitored simultaneously The solo function for the most recently soloed channels is enabled MONITOR TRIM This section adjusts the monitoring signal level in the dig ital domain MONITOR OUT LEVEL Use the MONITOR MONITOR OUT control on the top panel to adjust the monitoring signal level in the ana log domain MONITOR 2TR IN As a monitoring signal you can select either the 01V96i internal signals or 2TR IN digital inputs PHONES The Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack You can set the level independently Monitor and Solo Setup For monitoring and solo setup press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Mon itor page appears ENABLED incall jen s PRE FADER LMIXDOHM LAST SOLO SOLO TRIM O FADER SOLO RELEASE IHFTER
170. UND INPUTS ____ nossen Sid 726 nossen 7 NOASSIGN 32 FEL FEL FEL nossen nossen dS Initial Parameter to Control Change Table mon ma iw NOASSIGN NOASSIGN SS 2 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN 66 SURROUND Di INPUTS DVF 68 SURROUND DI INPUIS 69 SURROUND DVF 80 SURROUND DIF 7 86 SURROUND DIF INPUTZ 8 NOASSIGN tQ ON mm ON m PUT INPUT INPUTS NOASIGN 01V96i Reference Manual 169 xipueddy 170 Appendix MIDI CHANNEL14 S NO ASIN 1 50 2 SURROUND iNpuT26 76 SURROUND lFEH INPUTSO 78 SURROUND IFEH INPUTS2 79 SURROUND 1 38 NOANIN 20 NOASSIGN 22 33 NOASSIGN A NOASSIGN NOASSIGN 26 NOASSIGN 27 NN 39
171. UT23_ nossen O 89 PAN 90 PAN CHANNEL INPUIZ J 01 V96i Reference Manual 157 xipueddy 158 Appendix MIDI CHANNEL2 NO XASSICN 1 FADER CHANNEL INPUTZSS 2 CHANNEL INPUTZ6 6 FADER CHANNEL INPUTSO 78 FADER CHANNEL INPUTS2 79 FADERH_ CHANNEL STN MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER NOASIN OO o o 31 32 NOASSIGN MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER 01 V96i Reference Manual ma iw 60 FADERL MASTER AUX 6 y 6 NOASIN O O ON CHANNEL INFUTIS 69 came ON _____ Buss 8 NOASIN 8 NOASIN 86 NOASSIGN 8 NOASSIGN S NOASION OTC 89 PAN CHANNEL INPUT28 __ 790 PAN CHANNEL INPUTZ ON MASTER AUXI MASTER 3 NOXASIGN GlOWH 2 GlOWH m2 6 GlOWH NPUT6 7 n 5 to meus to m NOASSIGN 26 NOASSIGN 27 NOASSIGN NN NOASSIGN ooo so NOASSIGN 31 NOANGN 32 NOASSIGN NOASSIGN
172. Use a USB cable to connect the 01V96i 3 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to set the TARGET parameter to General DAW You can now remotely control the DAW software using the Remote Layer MIDI Remote Layer If you select USER DEFINED as the target for the Remote Layer you can remotely control the parameters of external MIDI devices such as synthesizers and tone generators by operating the channel ON buttons and faders to output var ious MIDI messages This is called MIDI Remote function You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel con trols in four banks When 01V96i is shipped from the fac tory it includes MIDI settings in these banks which you can quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function If necessary you can also assign other MIDI messages to the faders or ON buttons to remotely control the parameters of a connected MIDI device Using the MIDI Remote Function This section describes how to recall and use the factory preset MIDI Remote settings stored in the banks By default the 01V96i s four MIDI Remote banks Banks 1 4 contain the following MIDI messages Control Function Function Bank e buttons 1 Panning and setting GM voume sound levels Setting GM sound effect Effect Send Ex 3 Setting XG sound levels XG Setting XG sound levels levels Voume Adjusting mute and oe tute Volume for Cubase series mixer 1 Connect the 01V96i s MIDI OUT port to the MID
173. X2 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3 1 amp FX3 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 amp FX4 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 You can change these patches if you desire eID SIP joes 25 32 Slot Channels 1 8 ST IN Channels Effects Processor 1 4 Outputs 1 4 TO HOST USB port input channels 0581 05816 1 16 2 Move the cursor to an input patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parame ter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching i tr p 181 4 7 The long of the currently selected channel is indi cated in the upper right corner of the screen 1 Below the channel name is the long name of the selected input channel 2 See page 28 for information on changing channel names 01V96i Reference Manual yndy 44 Input amp Output Patching 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Channels Youcanstore the Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library Refer to Libraries on page 74 for more information Output Patching The 01 9615 Stereo Out Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 signals can be patched to any outputs ADAT OUT output channels and slot output channels Patch example Output Patching Aux Out 1 OMNI Out connector 1 Aux Out 2 OMNI Out connec
174. YPE 2 TYPE Selects the type of EQ TYPE is the EQ type used on leg Yamaha 02 series digital mixing consoles The TYPE algorithm minimizes the interference between bands 8 ATT Determines the amount of pre EQ signal attenuation in dB It is the same Attenuator parameter that appears on the EQ ATT In page 4 CURVE This area displays the current EQ curve 5 Meters These meters indicate the post EQ signal levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its available pair partner 6 LOW L MID H MID HIGH sections These sections contain the Q Frequency F and Gain G parameters for the four bands These parameter val ues range as follows LOW HIGH HPF 10 0 LPF 10 0 to 0 10 10 0 to 0 10 to 0 10 41 steps 41 steps 41 steps L SHELF H SHELF 21 2 Hz to 20 0 kHz a y 120 steps per 1 12 octave 18 0 dB to 18 0 dB 0 1 dB steps 1 The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF respec tively Tip The LOW band EQ functions as a high pass filter when the parameter in the LOW section is set to It func tions as a shelving type EQ when the Q parameter is set to L SHELF The HIGH band EQ functions as a low pass filter when the parameter in the HIGH section is set to LPF It func tions as a shelving type EQ when the Q parameter is set to H SHELE 3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter t
175. You can mute Sends by pressing the ON buttons if faders ON buttons and the PAN control are in Flip mode Refer to Flip Mode for more information Panning Sends A E You can pan channel signals sent to stereo Aux Sends by rotat ing the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control if faders ON buttons and the PAN control are in Flip mode Refer to the next section for more information Flip Mode In Flip mode you can use the faders ON buttons and the PAN control to control send levels pre post positions and mute settings as shown in the following table Channel level AUX Send level ON buttons AUX Send mute PAN control Channel AUX Send pan 1 Press the FADER MODE HOME button repeatedly so that the button indicator flashes The SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates FLIP N Press the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 5 but tons to select the desired Aux Sends The button indicator of the selected send lights up d Use the faders ON buttons and the PAN control to control the currently selected Aux send For stereo Aux input channels you can set the left and right panpots individually To do this press the FADER MODE AUX 7 button repeatedly When the button indicator is lit continuously you can set the left panpot When the button indicator is flashing you can set the right panpot Assigning Plug ins to Pro Tools Channels You can assign plug ins to five inserts av
176. a tion PAIR section This section indicates whether or not channels are paired The heart icon is in one piece when channels are paired The heart icon is broken when channels are not paired See page 26 for more information Viewing the Pan Fader and Aux Send Level Settings To display the View Fader page of a certain Input Channel use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button repeatedly Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the setting PAM 5 RUX TING 1 5 EJ Icy OOO CEHTER Es 222 2 1 PAN ON Fader section PAN control This control adjusts the currently selected Input Chan nel s Pan parameter Press the ENTER button to reset the Pan control to Center ON OFF button This button turns on or off the currently selected Input Channel e Fader This parameter sets the fader position of the cur rently selected Input Channel The fader knob is high lighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB Press the ENTER button to reset the Fader to 0 0 dB 2 SURROUND PAN section e SURROUND PAN The Surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode is selected See page 52 for more i
177. ables transmission and reception of Control Changes e Tx Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled e Rx Reception of Control Change mes sages is enabled or disabled ECHO This button determines whether Control Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 4 PARAMETER CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter Changes Tx Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled Rx Reception of Parameter Change mes sages is enabled or disabled ECHO ON OFFE This button determines whether Parameter Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 5 BULK This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk Dump data Rx Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled 6 OTHER COMMANDS ECHO ON OFF This button determines whether other MIDI messages received at the MIDIIN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 7 Fader Resolution This parameter specifies the resolution of the value out put when you operate the 01 9615 faders To transfer fader value data between two cascaded 01V96is or to record 01V96i operation to or play it back from a sequencer select the HIGH button When the
178. ailable for Pro Tools channel strips as follows 1 Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode 2 Press the FADER MODE AUX 8 button The AUX 8 button indicator flashes You can now select a channel to which you want to insert plug ins 3 Press the SEL button of each desired chan nel 4 Make sure that the INSERT PARAM button 0D is selected the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section 01 V96i Reference Manual If the PARAM button is selected instead move cursor to the button then press ENTER to select INSERT 1 1 INSERT BS3lIaGH EDIT COMPARE BYPASS I HSERT _ Move the cursor to ASSIGN button 2 then press ENTER to turn on the button You can now select plug ins If you press another chan SEL button after you turn on the ASSIGN button the button turns off If you wish to assign plug ins to other channels turn on the ASSIGN button again Pro Tools Remote Layer 91 Editing Plug ins You can edit plug ins inserted in the channel strips as follows 1 Press the 22 button to select Insert Display mode
179. an turn the sampling rate converters ofthe digital I O card on or off in pairs odd amp even channels in this order Initial Data STIZ STI 57 4 CH6 CHG EDIT G UD HIGHER SANFLE RATE OA RANSFER FORMAT 1 2 5 85 778 SLUT DOUBLE EB OFF OFF 36 kHz poen CHANNEL kHz se kHz 96 kHz OUT DIGITAL Pt 14 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13714 15 16 SLOT EAE IESACS FORMAT PREFER f PREFER bjj Tip The FS box on the Word Clock page displays the sam pling frequency at which the 01V96i is currently operating Note The sampling rate converter is available only on the Yamaha MY8 AE96S Digital I O card If you have installed another type of I O card in the slot or if no card is installed in the 01V96i the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to any two channel button in the SRC sections then press ENTER The sampling rate converter for the selected 2 channel input turns on or off When on the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the 01V96i s current sampling rate Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status You can view and monitor the Channel Status sampling rate emphasis etc of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS UTILITY button then press the F2 button The Utility CH St
180. and dou ble clicking the ENTER button The 01V96i calculates the tempo based on the time interval between your two taps clicks on the ENTER button Tip If the Freeze effect is selected the TEMPO section dis plays the record and playback buttons for using the effect the recording data condition and a progress bar that indicates the current status 7 Meters These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently selected effects processor Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively Tip You can also view the input and output levels of the effects processors on the Meter Effect 1 4 pages Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to adjust the setting You can store the edited set tings as a new program in the Effects library see page 76 Note You cannot change the effects type on this page To change the effects type recall a program that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library About Add On Effects The 01V96i comes with pre installed Add On Effects created with VCM technology to faithfully simulate analog circuits using digital processing Add On Effects will be stored in and recalled from preset 45 and the subsequent preset programs You can also store edited effects in user program 57 and the subsequent user programs EFFECT Initial Bert 5
181. arameter setting on or off press ENTER To modify the parameter variable rotate the Parameter wheel INSERT ASS 16H EDIT Ss d HETET 7 When you finish adjusting the parameters move the cursor to the INSERT PARAM but ton then press ENTER to switch it to INSERT Bypassing Plug ins You can bypass plug ins assigned to Pro Tools channels Before bypassing plug ins you must press the corresponding SEL button to select a channel to which the plug ins have been assigned then press the F2 button to select Insert Dis play mode To bypass plug ins display the parameters of the plug in you wish to bypass in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section then turn on the BYPASS button invA Off In A 6 8 HixL 18H 188 Eh 1 01V96i Reference Manual Scrub amp Shuttle By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User Defined buttons 1 8 you can scrub Pro Tools tracks back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel By assigning the DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined but tons 1 8 you can shuttle back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel 1 Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons 1 8 Before assigning parameters to these buttons you must switch layers to cancel the Remote function For more information on assigning the user defined keys refer to Using the Us
182. are not linked to each other 5 If you switched to Variable mode in Step 3 the PRE POST buttons and Send level rotary controls enable you to adjust the signal source points and Send levels Initial Data 2111 5112 51713 2114 EDIT MODE 5 B Y a GLOBAL 1a 11 12 12 Its 18 19 20 1 zz 25 24 1 2 26 za zu 31 Initial Data 2111 2112 STIS 27114 EDIT M 16 FAUTEHTT STI Variable Mode In this mode Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre fader or post fader Chan nel Send level rotary controls and PRE POST buttons appear on the screen Initial Data BILL 112 5113 5114 EDIT EX EU MODE FRE You can turn each Input Channel off for cur rently selected Aux Send even in Variable mode do Gi this move the cursor to the desired Send level control EA then press ENTER The rotary controls for Off chan 4 nels are grayed out F 3T POST Tip You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for each of the eight Aux Note e In Fixed mode all ON OFF buttons are turned OFE Post Post Posty posr Past UT EMI 16 Tip In Variable mode Aux Send levels Aux On Off and Pre Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked
183. are received and used to control effects STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note off message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity ignored 2 2 NOTE ON 9n Reception If OTHER ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT If the Rx CH matches these messages are received and used to control effects STATUS 1001 9n Note on message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity 1 127 on 0 01 2 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn Reception If Control Change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT If TABLE is selected these message are received if Control Change Rx is ON and will control parameters according to the Control assign table settings The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Pa rameter List If NRPN is selected these messages are received if Control Change Rx is ON and the Rx CH matches and will control the parameter that is specified by the four messages NRPN control number 62h 63h and Data Entry control num ber 06h 26h Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Pa rameter List Transmission If TABLE is selected operating a parameter specified in the Control assign table will cause these messages to be transmitted if Control Change Tx is ON The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List If NRPN is selected operating a specified parameter will cause data to be transmi
184. at a specified port To do so press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to display the MIDI Setup page Initial Data RS 2112 STIS STI4 G SETUP CHANNEL PARSE TER BULK COMMARDS Fader Resolution Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the CHANNEL row and turn the transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the param eter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COM MANDS 1 CHANNEL This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Chan nels for MIDI message transmission and reception The following parameters are available in this row abi b RR eee This parameter box specifies a MIDI Transmit Channel Jo ce This parameter box specifies a MIDI Receive Channel 2 PROGRAM CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program Changes Tx ON OFF Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled Rx Reception of Program Change mes sages is enabled or disabled OMNI ON OFF When this button is turned on Pro gram Changes on all MIDI Channels are received regardless of the CHANNEL row settings ECHO This button determines whether Program Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 3 CONTROL CHANGE This parameter row enables or dis
185. atch or compressor The insert position is indi cated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons 2 INSERT section ON OFF This button turns the Insert on or off OUT This parameter enables you to select outputs ADAT OUT channels slot output channels or internal effects inputs as the Insert Out destination IN This parameter enables you to select inputs ADAT IN channels slot input channels or internal effects outputs as the Insert In source 3 COMP section ON OFF This button turns the compressor on or off ORDER This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and compressor when they are inserted at the same signal path point With the COMP gt INS setting signals pass through the compressor first then the Insert With the INS setting signals pass through the Insert first then the compressor 3 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desired out puts slot channels or internal effects inputs to be patched to Insert Out The parameter indicators are explained below No assignment FX1 1 FX1 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2 1 FX2 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3 1 FX3 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 FX4 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 USB1 USB16 TO HOST USB port output chan nels 1 16
186. ation with a smooth decay and depth and spaciousness that will enhance the original sound You can choose one of three pro grams to suit the venue and your needs REV X Hall REV X Room and REV X Plate Description Specifies the duration of time REV TIME 0 32 32 14s until the reverberation decays to silence Higher values produce longer reverberation Specifies the time delay from when the original sound is input INLDLY 0 0 125 0ms until reverberation begins Higher values produce a longer delay before reverberation begins Specifies the shape of the rever DECAY beration s envelope This value ROOMSIZE will affect the characteristics of 53 the reverberation 28 10 Specifies the density and diffu sion of the reverberation Higher values will increase the density Specifies the size of the space Higher values simulate a broader 0 space This value is linked with the Reverb Time Changing this value will also change the Reverb Time and strengthen the sense of spa ciousness This is a filter that cuts the low frequency range of the Thru 8 00 kHz reverberation The region below the frequency specified here will be cut This filter does not affect the original sound This is a filter that cuts the high frequency range of the 1 00 kHz Thru reverberation The region above the frequency specified here will be cut This filter does not affect the original sound Adjusts the decay time of the high frequ
187. atus page appears UTILITY Initial Data 8 5713 27114 CH1 CHI ui d UJ ETT FSI 01 __ __ __ __ _ d d __ __ _ On this page use the following buttons to select a slot or connector for which you want to view the channel status 1 2TR IN This button enables you to view the Channel Status of input signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs 2 SLOT These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of each two adjacent odd and even in this order channel signals connected to the digital I O card installed in the slot 2 Move the cursor to the desired input or slot button then press ENTER Channel Status information for the selected input is dis played However if a mini YGDAI I O card other than AES EBU format is installed Channel Status information will be grayed out Channel Status information includes the following items 3 FS Indicates the sampling rate If no signal is being input or if the incoming wordclock is not synching to the internal clock Unlock appears 4 EMPHASIS Indicates the Emphasis on off status 5 CATEGORY Indicates the status of Category Code Bit included in the IEC958 Part 2 S PDIF Consumer format This parameter can display the following values 01 V96i Reference Manual Temporary used Laser Optical Laser optical device D D C
188. ayed below this parameter 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels For details on the Store and Recall functions see General Library Operation on page 74 If the selected memory s channel type does not match type of the destination channel an alarm mark word CONFLICT appear next to the STORED FROM parameter These alarms indicate that you tried to recall unrecallable channel settings to the cur rently selected channel The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround mode Aux pair and other non channel parameter set tings originally stored in the memory do not match those for the destination channel However if the channel type of the memory and that of the destination channel match you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators displayed For unmatched parameter settings the 01V96i will use the settings in the memory that is to be recalled The following preset memories are available for the Channel library Ne Preset Name Description This preset memory resets all parameters of the cur Reset dB rently selected channel to their initial values and sets the chan nel fader level to dB This preset memory resets all parameters of the cur rently selected channel to their initial values and sets the chan nel fader level to O dB 1 nominal Input Patch Library The Input Pat
189. back ratio THRU LN 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU i a o0 sped _ Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTEL 1 to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTER 1 to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO EE to determine FB DLY B B 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Low pass filter cutoff frequency DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in series Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN _99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio THRU LN 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LEE 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LEN 7 Delay and delayed reverb bal DLY BAL 0 100 ance 0 all delayed reverb 100 all delay pg Spread Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTE L 1 to determine left channel DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTE R to determine right channel DELAY R Used in conjunction with TEMPO NOTES to determine FB DLY ffi H3 FIT FR de d 1 3 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Low pass filter cutoff frequency DIST gt DELAY One input two output distortion and delay effects in series DSTI DST2 De m DST TYPE OVD1 OVD2 2 distor CRUNCH
190. bbbbb Oddddddd 11110111 FO 43 On ch el 4 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 4F mh ml ds de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl 0 32 Output patch Library no 0 32 256 Current data total block number minimum number is O current block number 0 total block number Output patch Library data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 28 Output patch library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01001111 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm 11110111 FO 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 4F mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 4 0 32 Output patch Library 0 32 256 Current data End of exclusive 01V96i Reference Manual IAIN xipueddy 180 Appendix MIDI 2 8 2 29 Plug in effect card bulk dump format The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number 0 SLOT 1 The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than the card that is i
191. ble Layer Using the Oscillator Using the User Defined Keys Using Operation Lock Initializing Troubleshooting Error messages Contents of the Reference Manual Specifications General Spec Libraries Analog Input Spec Analog Output Specs Digital Input Spec Digital Output Spec I O SLOT Spec MIDI USB WORD CLOCK I O Spec Dimensions Options Rack Mounting the 01V96i Using RK1 Rack Mount Kit Index 01V96i Block Diagram 01V96i Level Diagram 01V96i Reference Manual Jo 3 0 Function Tree Function Tree DISPLAY ACCESS Page numbers in parentheses are the page numbers of the Owner s Manual booklet BUTTON SCENE DIO SETUP MIDI UTILITY INSERT DELAY PAN ROUTING FUNCTION SCENE IN FADE OUT FADE RCL SAFE SORT PASTE SRC PASTE DST WORD CLOCK FORMAT PREFERT PREFER2 MIDI HOST MONITOR REMOTE MACHINE SURR BUS CASCADE OUTPUT ATT SETUP PGM ASGN CTL ASGN BULK OSCILLATOR CH STATUS BATTERY USER DEF LOCK PHASE INSERT DLY 1 16 DLY17 32 OUT DLY PAN ROUT1 16 ROUT17 STI BUS TO ST SURR MODE CH EDIT SURR1 16 SURR1 7 32 SURR ST IN 01V96i Reference Manual PAGE NAME SCENE MEMORY INPUT FADE TIME OUTPUT FADE TIME RECALL SAFE SORT GLOBAL PASTE SOURCE CH SELECT GLOBAL PASTE DESTINATION SCENE WORD CLOCK SELECT HIGHER SAMPLE RATE DATA TRANSFER FORMAT PREFERENCE
192. box is on the left and right front signals of the surround channels are output from the STEREO L R connectors 7 To change the assignment move the cursor to the desired Bus parameter rotate the Parameter wheel to select a channel then press ENTER The channels are swapped between the selected Bus and the Bus to which the channel assigned to the selected Bus was assigned previously Tip e Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS SETUP button repeat edly also displays the Surr Bus page Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround mode For example in 3 1 Surround mode Bus Outs 1 4 are available In 5 1 Surround mode Bus Outs 1 6 are available and in 6 1 Surround mode Bus Outs 1 7 are available 8 Depending on the selected Surround mode or applications patch the Bus Out signals to the outputs ADAT OUT channels or slot out put channels Connect a playback device or MTR to the output connectors To record surround pan movement to a DAW patch the corresponding bus outs to the TO HOST USB ports output channels send ing them to the DAWS tracks The following diagram illustrates an example of recording each channel s signal into DAW when using 5 1 Surround mode 01V96i TA Y OOO SURROUND 888558 Input Channel 1 pun SURROUND now camel Input Channel 2 SURROUND Input Channel 3 01V96i Reference
193. calibrate the position of the faders specified in the win dow HESSHGE Fader calibration data error Channel 4 Index 115 d Setting from the control surface Display section 9 n ex 38 FADER MODE section 8 Setting from the display 36 38 LAYER E6HOfft issue ah 8 De GY MEN NAE 38 Monitor out amp Headphones section Sym bo 5 Variable mode v Cnm 7 INS DLY 1 16 page 18 Viewing SCLIN OS cuu 37 SCENE MEMORY section 9 d INS DLY 17 32 page 18 Viewing settings for multiple SELECTED CHANNEL section 9 INS DLY Insert page 47 65 channels 40 SOLO section 9 INS DLY Dly page 30 37 Auxl Viewl 16 page 40 ST IN section 8 INS DLY Phase page 18 Auxl View17 STI page 40 STEREO section 8 INSERT DELAY button 8 USER DEFINED KEYS section 9 48V ON OFF switches B Control Surface amp Rear Panel 6 Balancing alte eee 33 4 15 Numerics Battery scs 113 Cursor buttons s 9 1 16 17 32 buttons 8 DB ulkdit p qose ttes 107 D 9 Messages 100 2 IN conn
194. ce Manual DOUBLE SPEED In Double Speed mode digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current high sampling rate 1 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz Select this mode if the devices that support the higher sampling rates transmit or receive data Note You can select this setting only for slots in which a dig ital I O card that inputs outputs double speed digital audio data e g MY8 AE96 8 2965 is installed SINGLE In Single mode digital audio data is received and trans mitted at a sampling rate that is half 44 1 48 kHz the current higher sampling rate of the 01V96i For example this is useful when you want to receive 44 1 kHz digital signals from an external digital device while the 01V 96i is operating at 88 2 kHz Note You cannot select this setting for slots in which a digital I O card that inputs outputs double speed digital audio data e g MY8 AE96 MY8 AE96S is installed 2 Tip The parameter fields display if the slot contains no I O card or if an AD DA card or other I O card that does not allow you to set the transfer format has been installed Input Channels 17 Input Channels This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96i s Input Channel parameters About Input Channels The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and tone of the signals input to the 01 961 and the signals output from the internal Effects processors 1 4 and route the s
195. ce software may occasionally drop out during Bulk Dump transmission To avoid this we recommend that you use the Stu dio Manager software to store 01 V96i data to an external device 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI mes sages see page 101 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the exter nal device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F4 button The MIDI Bulk page appears MIDI Init CHi CHi 00 eee The page includes following parameters 1 CATEGORY section This section enables you to select data for transmission and reception 2 REQUEST Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to transmit messages from the 01V96i that request a second 01V96i connected to the first 01V96i to transmit the data specified in the CATEGORY secti
196. ch 128 cl 0 32 Input patch Library no 0 32 256 Current data total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Input patch Library data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 26 Input patch library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010010 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm 11110111 FO 43 2n 7 4 40 20 20 38 43 39 33 52 mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 4 R 0 32 Input patch Library no 0 32 256 Current data End of exclusive 2 8 2 27 Output patch library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 0 32 Library no 32 256 current output patch data 8192 UNDO For reception by the 01V96i only the user area is valid 1 32 256 STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01001111 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ottttttt Obb
197. ch between Pre and Post only for Aux Sends that are set to Variable mode The FIX indication appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode and you cannot switch Pre Post 4 If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2 move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection then edit the Send level or turn the currently selected AUX Send on or off Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the Send level then press the ENTER but ton to turn the currently selected Aux Send on or off One of the following indicators appears depending on the current Aux mode e Aux Sends in Fixed mode A FIX indicator appears for On Aux Sends and a dot 2 appears for Off Aux Sends M d 3 4 5 6 7 amp 8 181112 12 14 15 16 Aux Sends in Variable mode The current Send levels are displayed by the bar graphs If the level is set to nominal 0 0 dB N appears in the bar The bars for Aux Sends that are turned off are high lighted INPUT ee 5 2 Panning Aux Sends 41 Panning Aux Sends You can pair adjacent odd even in this order Aux Sends for stereo operation This enables you to pan signals from Input Channels to paired Aux Sends 1 Pair the desired two Aux Sends See page 33 for more information on pairing channels 2 Use the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 but tons to select one of the paired Aux Sends 3 Repea
198. ch library enables you to store and recall all Input Patch settings The library contains one preset memory and 32 user readable amp writable memories To access the Input Patch library press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch IN LIB page appears For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 74 PATCH Initial Data eee E PATCH LIBRARY LIBRARY TITLE Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data lat lat lat a LII LII LII LII LII LII Input Patch preset memory 0 contains the following settings Input Channels 1 16 INPUT connectors 1 16 Input Channels 17 24 ADAT IN Channels 1 8 Input Channels 25 32 Slot Channels 1 8 Internal Effects Processor 1 4 ST IN Channels 1 4 Outputs 1 amp 2 01 V96i Reference Manual 6 Libraries Output Patch Library The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all Output Patch settings The library contains one preset mem ory and 32 user readable amp writable memories To access the Output Patch library press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out LIB page appears For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 74 PATCH Initial Data 2222 a OUTPUT FATCH LIBRARY LIBRARY TITLE
199. channel press the INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears DLY 1 16 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 1 16 DLY 17 32 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 17 32 The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same s initial Data 5112 5113 S114 0 GJ Gi CHi 16 DELA CH1 DELAY SCALE Samene ii Z i3 i49 i5 iB i Fi 8 msecl 8 8 G G 8 0 samriel ai ai ai ai Mix 190 198 100 100 100 100 100 100 FEGAN ok ok a8 i i 13 i 1 15 i 16 GFF EF GEE GEE Gee GEE Ger Gel msecl G G zamrie a HIX 1 100 1099 1909 1099 160 190 100 FB GAIM oki o OLYi i6 nb v17 32 E IS 1 DELAY SCALE The following buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec value e Units set to meters feet Units are set to feet e sample Units are set to samples beat Units are set to beats Units are set to timecode frames 2
200. clusive 2 8 3 1 4 Parameter request basic format Universal format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 Ottttttt 11110111 FO 43 3n 3E 7F tt ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Data type Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive 01 V96i Reference Manual MIDI Data Format 181 2 8 3 1 5 Parameter Address Consult your dealer for parameter address details 2 8 3 2 Parameter change STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA 2 8 3 3 Parameter request STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00000001 11110111 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 00000001 11110111 FO 43 7 01 Ge dd F7 FO 43 3n 3E 7F 01 ee pp F7 2 8 3 4 Parameter change STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 2 8 3 5 Parameter request STATUS ID No SU
201. ction 0 Meter METER METER PEL 55 844 INSERT 7 m nerd o AUX 1 8 48AND 222 OUTPUT EQ DELAY m INSERT ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer COMP Compressor e ON On Off e LEVEL OUTPUT DELAY Output delay e METER These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 see page 29 Tip You can also pair adjacent odd even Aux Sends in this order for stereo Aux operation Note With the default setting Aux Out 1 4 are patched to OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 and to internal Effects processors 1 4 How ever you can change this patching on the Patch Output page Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Display To set Aux Out 1 8 parameters you can either move the cur sor to the desired parameter on the screen and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen Tip Refer to Input Output Patching on page 43 for more information on how to set inserts Attenuating Aux Outs To attenuate Aux Out 1 8 signals press the EQ button then press the F4 button to display the EQ Out Att page 0 Initial Data 5111 STI2 STI3 5714 Rua1 nusi Ln EX OUTPUT ATTENUATOR Bus 1 4 5 AUX ooooGGG Bde dB ede Bd
202. d MIDI IN 000009099 MIDI IN A 052 ET C ark 24 3 5 2 2 E 2 ent ow 9 om QM Foot switch 2 3 4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears then set the TARGET parame ter to USER DEFINED You can now use the MIDI Remote function Refer to the previous section for more information on using the MIDI Remote function Move the cursor to the desired bank button BANK parameter buttons 1 4 then press ENTER Press the SEL buttons for the desired chan nels Currently assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON and FADER sections Tip You can also choose the desired channels using the ID SHORT and LONG parameters 4 Move cursor to LEARN button in the ON section then press ENT
203. d channels from the Channel library For example you cannot recall Input Channel 1 32 settings to ST IN Channels 1 4 Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 or Stereo Out with the excep tion that memories 0 and 1 can be recalled to any channels Follow the steps below to use the Channel library 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button repeatedly until the View Library page appears ANNE LIBRARY SEL CH CURRENT CONF I GUBRT SURROUND HOCE AUS CONF 15 D 1 2 STEREO 3 20 2 IQQ SITIS 514 T O 0 G2 5 6 2 7 6 LIBRARY TITLE Data al Data T Data T Data sl Data Heset tHdB 1 SEL CH This parameter indicates the currently selected channel 2 CURRENT CONFIGURATION section If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel 1 32 or ST IN Channels 1 4 its Surround mode and Aux configuration information is displayed here 3 Level meters These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected channel and the available partner 4 STORED FROM This parameter indicates the channel for which the set tings were originally stored in the selected library mem ory If the currently selected library memory contains Input Channel 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 settings its Surround mode and Aux pairing information are also displ
204. d dB NC 34 N UJ Limiter1 Ratio 3 e Attack T Atack m 0 Out gain dB Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Z Total Comp1 Out gain dB N A 5 Threshold dB Ratio 1 6 Attack ms 11 Atack ms __ 11 Out gain dB 60 Sampling SN Release ms N N Solo Vocal1 01V96i Reference Manual Dynamics Parameters 151 Dynamics Parameters The dynamics effects for each channel strip include a Gate section only for Input Channels and a Comp section The Gate section includes Gate and Ducking types The Comp section includes Compressor Expander Compander Hard COMP H and Compander Soft COMP S types GATE Section Only for Input Channels GATE A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount RANGE THRESHOLD dB 54 0 to 0 0 541 points This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied RANGE dB 70 to 0 71 points This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes This determines how fast the gate opens when the an signal exceeds the threshold level 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec 48kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 sec This determines how long the gate stays open HOLD ms 88 2kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 sec once the trigger signal has fallen below the thresh 96kHz 0 01 ms 981 ms old 160 points 44 1kHz 6 ms 4
205. d Aux Sends are in Variable mode the Aux Send levels Aux On Off and Pre Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other If paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode the Aux On Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to each other Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends While Aux Sends are in Variable mode you can copy all Input Channel fader positions on one layer to the corresponding Aux Sends This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the same balance setting as the Ste reo Out signals 1 Press and hold down the copy source layer LAYER 1 16 17 32 button Note If you release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2 you will be unable to complete the Copy operation 2 Press one of the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons to select the desired Aux Send copy destination The confirmation window for the Copy operation appears COMF I OM 1 16 Level Cory to AUX 1 SEND YES 3 To execute the Copy operation move the cur sor to the YES button then press ENTER To cancel the Copy operation move the cursor to the NO button then press ENTER Tip If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertical partner in another Layer the fader position will be copied to the partners Aux Send 01V96i Reference Manual Input amp Output Patching 43 Input amp
206. e Bde STEREO E amp BdB The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 20 01 V96i Reference Manual Setting Aux Out 1 8 from Display 37 Delaying Aux Outs To delay Aux Out 1 8 signals press the DISPLAY ACCESS INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the d INS DLY page appears mr i STIz STIS 5714 EE of HSZ DLY Initial Data 1 51 OUTPUT DELAY DELAY SCALE peg BLS Joe Do xm 1 id GFF HA GEE grt GEE GEE GFF msecl 0 samrie ALS i c ow ov Xx t 4 5S 8 OFF GFE GEE GEE GEE 522 msec 8 8 G G G G zampe a a STEREO L mzec zamrie The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the MIX FB GAIN parameters see page 18 Tip You can also display the Out Dly page if you select the desired Aux Out 1 8 by pressing the corresponding SEL button while the DLY related parameters are indicated on the page Comp settings To set the Aux Out 1 8 compressors press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS b
207. e DATA NAME indicate the bank number 0 Library no 1 199 Library 200 256 CH1 287 CH32 288 STEREO 1L 295 STEREO 4R 384 BUS1 391 BUS8 512 AUX1 519 AUX8 768 STEREO 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96i only the user area is valid 40 199 256 STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010001 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ottttttt FO 43 ch cl 4 40 20 20 38 43 39 33 51 mh ml tt System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl 0 199 EQ Library no 1 200 256 Channel current data total block number minimum number is O Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds EQ Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MID
208. e IDs identify connected devices enabling recognition during MMC transmission and reception 4 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section This section enables you to specify ports for various spe cial functions Studio Manager In the left parameter box select MIDI USB or SLOT as the port used by the included Studio Manager software In the two small parameter boxes on the right specity a port number if you selected USB and an ID number DAW Select USB or SLOT as a port for use with a DAW Specity in the right parameter box a port number pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REMOTE This parameter indicates the target currently selected for Remote Layer If the target is set to USER DEFINED you can select a MIDI message destination port CASCADE LINK This parameter determines whether MIDI messages are transmitted between two cascaded 01 9615 If you select MIDI MIDI messages will be transferred between two cascaded units If you select no MIDI messages transferred The TRANSMIT and REQUEST buttons are used to syn chronize all parameters that are cascade linked The TRANSMIT button synchronizes the connected 01V96i s parameters to your primary 01V96i s parameters The REQUEST button synchronizes your 01V96i parameters to the connected 01V96i s parameters 01 V96i Reference Manual ICHIA 102 Selecting MIDI Messages for Transmission and Reception You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received
209. e assignments on this page e NRPN The assignments on the Ctl Asgn page are ignored and predefined NRPNs Non Registered Parameter Num bers are transmitted for remote control Tip NRPNs are special MIDI messages that combine three different Control Changes They enable you to control many parameters on a single MIDI Channel 5 If you turned on the TABLE button in Step 4 move the cursor to a parameter box in the No CH column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the MIDI channels and Control Changes to which you want to assign param eters You can assign parameters to up to 16 channel Control Changes on the Ctl Asgn page regardless of the MIDI Channels currently selected for transmission and recep tion Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in Step 4 6 Select parameters in the parameter boxes in the three PARAMETER columns Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the first PARAMETER column and specify the desired values in the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAME TER columns The following parameters and values are available FADER H AUX4 SEND INPUT1 32 ST IN1 4 5 SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND BUS ST BUS1 8 BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO 1 32 5 IN1 4 01 V96i Reference Manual Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control 105 CHANNEL INPUT1 32 ST 1 1 4 MASTER BUS1
210. e using the Remote Layer Configuring Computers 1 Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver from the following URL and install the driver as described in the included installation guide http www yamahaproaudio com 2 Use a USB cable to connect the 01V96i 3 Make sure that the 01V96i is powered on 4 Launch Nuendo Cubase select the Device Setup menu and set up Nuendo Cubase so that the 01V96i can communicate with the software Refer to the Nuendo Cubase User s Manual for more information on setting up the software B Configuring 01V96i 1 Refer to page 84 to configure the DIO Setup MIDI HOST page 2 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to set the TARGET parameter to Nuendo Cubase You can now remotely control Nuendo Cubase using the Remote Layer 01 V96i Reference Manual 94 Remote Control Other DAW Remote Layer You can remotely control DAW software that supports the Pro Tools protocol Configuring Computers 1 Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver from the following URL and install the driver as described in the included installation guide http www yamahaproaudio com 2 Launch and set up the DAW software so that the 01V96i communicates with the software Refer to the DAW softwares user s manual for more infor mation on setting up the software Configuring the 01V96i 1 Refer to page 84 to configure the DIO Setup MIDI HOST page 2
211. eay DENS 03005 10 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Rear Panel PHANTOM 48V p 10 AD Output Section p 10 PHAI M 48V CH9 12 CH5 8 CH1 4 ON I I orr ON STEREO OUT 4dB BAL MONITOR OUT OMNI OUT 4dB BAL 4dB BAL OUT sow AC IN Power Section p 11 PHANTOM 48V PHANTOM 48V CH9 12 CH5 8 CH1 4 on oFF on orr 1 CH1 4 ON OFF switch 2 5 8 ON OFF switch 3 CH9 12 ON OFF switch AD Output Section STEREO OUT 4dB BAL MONITOR OUT 4dB BAL Eoo AL MNI O 5 2 0 0 Q Q 0903 1 MONITOR OUT connectors L R 2 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 3 STEREO OUT connectors L R WORD CLOCK Digital 1 Section MIDI USB Section p 10 p 10 MIDI TO HOST 2TR IN DIGITAL 00 OUT COAXIAL COAXIAL THRU USB 2 0 SLOT SLOT Section p 11 Digital 1 Section WORD CLOCK I 1 WORD CLOCK OUT connector 2 WORD CLOCK IN connector 3 ADAT IN OUT connectors 4 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 5 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2TR OUT 2TR IN DIGITAL DIGITAL COAXIAL COAXIAL MIDI USB Section TO HOST 2 0 1 MIDI IN THRU OUT ports 2 TO HOST USB port 01 V96i Reference Manual SLOT Section 1 SLOT SLOT Pow
212. ectors 712 DS 29 SecL OE 9 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 10 30 DAW enms e EE 93 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 13 30 Nuendo Cubase 93 2TR OUT connectors 7 13 Delaying 30 94 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 10 31 Pro touesse 83 2 OUT DIGITAL connector 13 and Balancing 33 Remote 83 addens 25 9 18 30 37 Peli eC 11 Routing signals to stereo bus DELAY SCADE 18 AD input e 31 19 AD output section 10 Setting from the control surface 133 ADI5 16 selector ss 39 DELAY SCALE unco 18 ADAT INJOUT 10 13 Setting from the display 0 FER oues iini tien 139 Add O ficis 67 Setting the levels 39 DELAY REV 140 AMP SIMULATE 136 Viewing the settings 3L DELAY SER caressant 139 Analog inputs amp outputs 22 12 BUSI BU SS 9d JDEDLAY TEV 140 Assigne Digital SECON 10 Control changes 104 Digital inputs amp outputs
213. ed button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Auto SOLO Display If this check box is on the DIO Setup Monitor page appears automatically when you solo an Input Channel Auto WORD CLOCK Display If this check box is on the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears automatically if the currently selected external wordclock source fails Auto Channel Select Ifthis check box is on you can select a channel by moving the corresponding fader or by turning on the corre sponding channel SOLO or ON button Store Confirmation If this check box is on the Title Edit window to input a Scene or library memory name appears when you store a Scene or library memory Recall Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation window appears when you recall a Scene or library memory Patch Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output Patches Pair Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation message appears when you create or cancel a pair Nominal Pan If this check box is checked and when Input Channel sig nals are panned hard left or hard right the signals on the left odd channels and right even channels will be at the nominal level If this check box is not checked these sig nals will be boosted by 3 dB When the signals are panned to center they will be at the nominal level In Surround mode the same thing applies when any Sur roound pan chan
214. ee eSS LIBRARY TITLE hate Reverb Ref Heuerb Plate Heuerb Stage Heuerb Room EFFECT TYPE HALL 1 1 This parameter displays name of the Effects program currently selected by the Effects processor 2 TYPE This parameter displays the effects type currently used by the Effects processor The number of input and output channels for the currently used effects appears below the TYPE parameter CE Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the Effect FX1 FX2 Edit FX3 Edit or 4 Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters a CEE Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the In Patch Effect page to assign the input and output signals of Effects processors 1 4 5 Level meters These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently selected Effects processor Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively 01V96i Reference Manual Using Libraries 7 For details on storing and recalling programs see General Library Operation on page 74 The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library e Reverbs PresetName 76 Gate Reverb GATE REVERS Gated eatyreflections Gated reverse early reflections Delays PresetName bee
215. eeeeeee i E 4 MODE EDIT f SURRI 16 2 e 1 5 These graphs display trajectory patterns and the rent pan positions for the Input Channels 2 parameter box This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel left and right 3 parameter box This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel front and rear 8 To move the sound image of each channel on these pages move the cursor to the desired channel then rotate the Parameter wheel The pan setting of the channel changes along the trajec tory pattern Press ENTER to display the cur rently selected channels CH Edit page 01 V96i Reference Manual Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters 59 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters This chapter describes how to group faders or ON buttons for multiple channels and link the EQ or compressor param eters for simultaneous operation Grouping amp Linking On the 01V96i you can group faders or ON buttons for multiple Input Channels Input Channels 1 32 ST IN Chan nels 1 4 or multiple Output Channels Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 Stereo Out and link the EQ or compressor param eters The following elements can be grouped or linked within Input Channels or Output Channels Fader group Input Channel or Output Chann
216. effects 9n NOTE ON rx Control the internal effects Bn CONTROL CHANGE rx tx Control parameters Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx tx Switch scene memories 1 2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE Command rx tx function F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER rx MTC FRAME 1 3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE Command rx tx function F8 TIMING CLOCK rx MIDI clock FE ACTIVE SENSING rx Check MIDI cable connections FF RESET rx Clear running status 1 4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 1 4 1 Real Time System Exclusive function MMC command Command rx tx FO 7F dd 06 F7 MMC tx COMMAND FO 7F dd 07 F7 MMC RESPONSE rx FO 7F dd 01 F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx response MTC full message 1 4 2 System Exclusive Message 1 4 2 1 Bulk Dump Command rx tx function FO 43 On 7E F7 BULK DUMP BULK DUMP DATA DATA rx tx FO 43 2n 7E F7 BULK DUMP BULK DUMP REQUEST REQUEST rx tx The following data types of bulk dump are used on the 01V96i function Data name tx rx m tx rx Scene Memory amp Request compressed data Ss tx rx Setup Memory amp Request User defined remote amp Request V tx rx User defined keys amp Request U tx rx User assignable layer amp Request C tx rx Control change table amp Request P tx rx Program change table amp Request tx rx Equalizer library amp Request tx rx Compressor library amp Request G tx rx Gate library amp Request t
217. el faders or level con trols can be grouped There are eight Input Channel Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups When channel faders or level controls are grouped oper ating any one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders or level controls while maintain ing the relative level differences Also the 01V96i features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of all grouped chan nels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative level balance between channels Mute group Input Channel or Output Channel ON buttons can be grouped There are eight Input Channel mute groups and four Output Channel mute groups When channel ON buttons are grouped pressing any one of them turns the ON buttons for all the grouped channels on or off A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time which turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped ON buttons Also the 01V96i features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped channels using the Master Mute buttons EQ Link Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked There are four EQ links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter settings When you change an EQ parameter value for one of the linked channels the change is applied to all other linked channels
218. els are soloed In this mode the ON button indicators flash Explicit mute In this mode the channels are turned off manually In this mode the ON button indicators turn off Panning Channels You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings 1 Press the FADER MODE AUX 7 button The button indicator lights up 2 Press the button to select Channel Dis play mode On a Channel Display mode page parameter controls 1 16 indicate the pan settings Press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust the pan setting To adjust the stereo channel panpots press the STEREO SEL button then press the AUX 7 button to select the L or R channel Pressing the AUX 7 button repeatedly toggles between the left and right channels When the left channel is selected the AUX 7 button indicator lights up and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates When the right channel is selected the AUX 7 button indicator flashes and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates Note Before you adjust monaural channel panpots first be sure the AUX 7 button indicator is illuminated steadily If the indicator is flashing operating the PAN control will be ineffective gt Adjust the selected channel panpot using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control To reset the corresponding channel panpot to center move the cursor to the parameter control on the di
219. emote Control Configuring Macintosh Computers Configuring the 01V96i 1 Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver Follow the steps below to set up the 01V96i so that you can from the following URL remotely control Pro Tools from the 01V96i Remote Layer http h dio p www yamahaproaudio com 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup 2 Install the driver in your computer as P MIDI Host page appears described in the installation guide included in the downloaded file DIO SETUP 00 m 5 Data t s t t 3 Connect the 01V96i TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac using a USB cable __ Rx PORT 4 sure that the 01V96i is powered on T CASCADE LINK E 5 Launch Pro Tools Hee REGUEST 6 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to open the Peripherals window 7 Double click the MIDI Controllers tab MIDI HOST f fe 3 8 Refer to the screen below to set the Type Receive From Send To and Ch s parame 2 Move the cursor to the first DAW parameter ters box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section then The 01V96i can emulate up to two MIDI controllers rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as the port Peripherals Synchronization Machine Control Ethernet Controllers Mic Preamps 3 Press ENTER to confirm the setting
220. en the L and R channels of the Stereo Out 2 ON OFF This button turns the Stereo Out on or off and links with the ON button in the STEREO section 3 Fader This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels and links with the STEREO fader The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB Bus Out 1 8 Fader page 1 BUS ON OFF This button turns the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 on or off and links with the ON 9 16 button in the Master layer 2 BUS Fader This fader sets the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 level and links with the fader 9 16 in the Master layer The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB 3 TO ST PAN This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 4 TO ST ON OFF This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out sig nal for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 5 TO ST Fader This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 Tip The TO ST PAN ON OFE and TO ST Fader parameters also appear on the Pan Route Bus to St page 01 V96i Reference Manual Setting Stereo Out and Out 1 8 from Control Surface 33 Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Control Surface You can use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain pa
221. ency reverberation HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 This specifies the high fre quency decay time as a propor tion of the Reverb Time Adjusts the decay time of the low frequency reverberation LO RATIO 0 1 1 4 This specifies the low frequency decay time as a proportion of the Reverb Time Specifies the frequency on which Lo Ratio is based The region LO FREQ 22 0 Hz 18 0 kHz below this frequency will be affected by the Lo Ratio Use the METER IN OUT Level switches to choose whether the meter input level or output level will be shown Adjusts the balance between the original sound and the effect sound MIX 0 10090 Only original sound will be output if this value is 0 and only the effect sound will be out put if this value is 100 Max 100 This is a 1 in 1 out phaser that emulates a vintage effect that was manufactured only during the late 1970s Switches the sound quality tone There are four types 1 2 3 4 available each with differences in modulation amplitude and in the amount of feedback SYNC 0 100 10 000 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation Vintage Phaser This is a 1 in 1 out phaser that offers an extremely high level of freedom in creating phaser sounds without limiting itself to emulating any particular model SPEED SYNC 0 1 10 0 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation MANUAL 10 00 10 00 Adjusts the center frequency of modulation DEPTH 0 00 10 00 Adjusts the depth of modulation FEEDBACK 0 00
222. er Defined Keys in the Owners Manual separate booklet 2 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to enable remote control of Pro Tools 3 Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped 4 Press the User Defined button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1 You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function s Rotate the Parameter wheel Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle forwards Turn it counterclockwise to scrub or shuttle backwards The minimum scrub playback step varies depending on the zoom setting in the Pro Tools Edit window 6 To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function press the User Defined button or DAW SHUTTLE to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB param eter in Step 1 Alternatively you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle func tion by pressing the User Defined button to which the DAW STOP parameter is assigned The Scrub function is automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast forward Note The Scrub Shuttle operation might be stopped unex pectedly by Pro Tools Therefore whenever you use the Scrub or Shuttle function make sure that the PWHEEL MODE parameter indicates SCRUB or SHUTTLE You can check the Scrub Shuttle function status by viewing the correspond ing User Defined button indicator Nuendo Cubase Remote Layer 93 Automation If you assign a parameter that controls Pro Tools Automation mode such as DAW Auto Read DAW Auto To
223. er Section 1 POWER ON OFF switch 2 AC IN connector e a 8 Ne OFF L AC IN 2 11 01V96i Reference Manual Jeay DENS 12 Analog amp Digital 1 Analog Digital I O This chapter describes 01V96i s analog and digital input output connectors as well as the basic operations involving the digital I Os Analog Inputs amp Outputs Input Section The 01V96i s top panel features input connectors which enable you to connect microphone and line level sources INPUT connectors A 1 12 1 2 These balanced TRS type phone connectors accept line level and microphone sig nals The nominal input range is 60 dB through 4 dB The phantom 48V switches on the rear panel turn on or off the 48V phantom power feed to these inputs e INPUT connectors B 1 12 B B These balanced TRS type con nectors accept line level and microphone signals The nominal input range is 60 dB through 4 dB You cannot use same numbered INPUT A and INPUT B connectors simultaneously For example you cannot use INPUT A 2 and INPUT B 2 at the same time If you connect cables to A and B connectors of the same num ber only the signal from INPUT B is effective e g B 2 takes priority over A 2 INPUT connectors 13 16 13 15 These balanced TRS type phone con nectors accept line level signals When the AD 15
224. es depending on the type of effect programs initially recalled Note You cannot select a channel as the destination of mul tiple effect signals If you select a channel that is already selected in another OUT parameter box that OUT parame ter box switches its indicator to not assigned 5 Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the effects processor Refer to Aux Outs on page 36 for information on setting the Aux Sends Note Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends patched to the effects processors input on the effects return channels Oth erwise the signal will return to the same channel creating a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers Tip Use the Master layer fader to adjust the final Aux Send output level At this time you can view the level on the Meter Master page 6 Adjust the level pan and EQ of the Input Channels patched to the effect outputs Tip To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux sends with the original dry sound set the effects MIX BALANCE parameter to 100 only the effects sound will be output Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels or Output Channels Bus 1 8 Aux Bus 1 8 or the Stereo Bus Note e You cannot use Insert In and Out for ST IN Channels Ifeffects are inserted in channels you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert them into other chan
225. essages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the 01 961 is operated For details refer to the MMC specification 2 8 2 BULK DUMP This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within the 01V96i The basic format is as follows For DUMP DATA FO 43 On 7E cc Model ID tt mm mm Data cs F7 For DUMP REQUEST FO 43 2n 7E Model ID tt mm mm F7 n Device Number DATA COUNT the number of bytes that follow this ending before the checksum 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 ModelID tt DATA TYPE mm mm DATA NUMBER cs CHECK SUM A unique header Model ID is used to determine whether the device is a 01V96i CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT LOW and end before CHECK SUM taking the binary compliment of this sum and then setting bit 7 to 0 CHECK SUM sum amp Ox7F Reception This message is received if Bulk RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS When a bulk dump is received it is immediately written into the specified memory When a bulk dump request is received a bulk dump is immediately transmit ted Transmission This message is transmitted on the Tx CH by key operations in the MIDI BULK DUMP screen A bulk dump is transmitted on the Rx CH in response to a bulk dump request The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8 bit data into eight words of 7 bit data Conversion fr
226. ettings as a Scene in a special memory area There are 99 Scene memories and you can recall any Scene using the display pages or the controls on the top panel Tip You can recall Scenes by transmitting Program Changes from external MIDI devices see page 103 You back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 107 What is Stored ina Scene The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene All channel Delay settings excluding ST IN Channels All channel Compressor settings Mix parameters excluding ST IN Channels Input channel Gate settings exclud ing ST IN Channels All channel EQ settings All channel Pan settings All channel routings Fader groups Mute groups Fader group Masters Mute group Masters EQ links and Compressor links All channel pair settings Effect programs recalled for Effects processors 1 4 and their parameter settings Fader and ON button status only when Remote Control Target is set to USER DEFINED Scene settings Scene titles and Fade Time settings Input Patching Input Patch library Currently selected Output Patch Output Patening library P Effects parameters Remote Layer Note Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library num bers that are in use at the time the Scene is stored but exclude current edited Input and Output patching Ifyou do not store the edited Input
227. f Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O0001nnnn 11 n20 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00011010 01 961 ADDRESS 00100010 22 Remote Time counter O000tttt Ot O Time code 1 Measure Beat Clock Oddddddd dd Hour Measure H Oddddddd dd Minute Measure DATA Oddddddd dd Second Beat Oddddddd dd Frame Clock EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 26 Parameter request Remote Time Counter Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the Time Counter information is transmitted on the Rx CH channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds When the second byte of Address is received on Ox7F data transmission will be halted immediately disable Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 011 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00011010 1A OlV96i ADDRESS 00100010 22 Remote Time counter Oddddddd 0 Transmission request Ox7F Transmission stop request EOX 11
228. f you set the internal effects processors return signal to Solo Safe you can monitor the soloed pro cessed or wet signals MONITOR TRIM This parameter enables you to trim the level of the mon itoring signal in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB 9 MONO This button switches the Monitor signal into mono Using the Monitor 1 di Connect a monitoring system to the MONI TOR OUT connectors To monitor the signal via headphones connect head phones to the PHONES jack Press the Monitor Source selector in the MONITOR section to select the monitoring signal source MONITOR 2TR IN To monitor 01V96is internal signals turn off the selector the button should be raised To monitor the sig nals at the 2TR IN connectors turn on the selector the button should be pushed in Adjust the monitoring level using the MONI MONITOR LEVEL control while playing the sound sources To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via head phones turn the PHONES LEVEL control 01 V96i Reference Manual Using the Solo Function 51 Using the Solo Function You can solo and monitor Input Channels Aux Out 1 8 and Bus Out 1 8 using the SOLO buttons on the top panel 1 Press the DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Monitor page appears 2 Set the SOLO parameter to On Set other parameters on the page if necessary 3 To solo and monitor Input Channels press the corres
229. ge ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 11 n20 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call 0110 6f clear function Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number SCENE LIB CLEAR 0x60 1 99 EQ LIB CLEAR 0x61 41 200 GATE LIB CLEAR 0x62 5 128 COMP LIB CLEAR 0x63 37 128 EFF LIB CLEAR 0x64 xx 128 1 CHANNEL LIB CLEAR 0x66 1 128 INPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x67 1 32 OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x68 1 32 1 Varies with the firmware version 2 8 3 14 Parameter change Function call attribute Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the attribute of the specified memory library will be changed Transmission In response to a request a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH If Parameter change ECHO is ON this message will be retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 11 n20 15 Device Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0000 Of attribute Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmm
230. ginal DELAY x previous TEMPO new TEMPO 250 x 120 121 247 9 ms Thus the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247 9 ms a Rounded values are used for the calculation results Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ values You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ to exceed their maximum possible values when syn chronized to tempo This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters Itisa common value shared by all effects You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library You can store it to and recall it from a Scene This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored Here is an example Store the effect 120 Change TEMPO to 60 Recall the effect TEMPO 60 Normally when you change the TEMPO the DELAY or FREQ will be re set accordingly However if the DELAY or FREQ were changed the effect would sound differ ently when recalled than when it was stored To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall the 01V96i does not update the DELAY or FREQ value when an effect is recalled even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effec
231. h the sampling frequencies sup ported by the external devices 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears Select INT88 2k or INT96k as the wordclock source Note When the 01V96i operates at a high sampling rate 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz only two internal effects processors are available Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears DID SETUPIC D Ini ti al Data 5111 112 SII SII EH HIGHER SAMPLE DATA TRANSFER FORMAT OUT DIGITRL OFF Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to an IN OUT parameter field 1 then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the data transfer format The IN OUT parameters are used to set one of the follow ing data transfer formats for each slot input and output DOUBLE CHANNEL In Double Channel mode digital audio data is received and transmitted as mono signals at a sampling rate that is exactly half 44 1 48 kHz the current higher sampling rate Data is handled by two channels This is useful when you want to transfer data between the 01V96i operating at a higher sampling rate and an external digital device that supports 44 1 48 kHz Note Double Channel mode reduces the total number of inputs or outputs on the corresponding slot The even num bered channels are disabled 01 V96i Referen
232. he edited version from Shadow memory has been recalled 02 scene Original Scene Display 02 m Shadow memory Edit indicator If a Shadow memory is recalled the edited version is stored when you store the Scene The contents of the Original and Shadow memories then become identical 01 V96i Reference Manual Fading Scenes 71 Fading Scenes You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Chan nel faders or level controls to move to their new positions when a Scene is recalled This is called Fade Time and it can be set for each channel in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 sec onds in 0 1 second steps You can set the Fade Time for each Scene individually or for all Scenes globally Fading Input Channels To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene In Fade page appears Move the cursor to the desired channel parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the Fade Time setting SCENE InitiallData 111 51125113 5714 H1 CHI 10 pem i HFUT FADE TIME Global Fade Time ij 4 gt i 29 5 00 0 ima i ia 14 INPUT agp a i Gee sec if i 18 22 23 i E g ima 25 i 26 f sa isi 8 ieee 88 8 1 Global Fade Time When
233. he desired channel s 2 button 2 then press ENTER The channels are paired 01 V96i Reference Manual sjouueu andu 28 Input Channels 4 To cancel a pair move the cursor to the Naming Input Channels desired channel s STEREO button then press ENTER By default Input Channels are named CH1 CH2 etc You can change these names if desired For example it may be helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Channel with the type of musical instrument connected to the corre sponding input jack Tip You can also create or cancel a pair of Output Channels in the same way on the Pair Grup Output page see page 33 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch IN Name page appears jal Datal 2201 112 8113 8114 ke C vp 2 Inrut Auto Cor LONG You can specify Short names in the center column C and Long full names in the right column 2 When the Name Input Auto Copy check box 3 is on the first four characters of a newly entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name On the other hand a newly entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name You can reset all channel names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then press ing ENTER 2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change then press ENTER The Title Edit window appea
234. he display Left Right Up Down lt a gt gt 1 cursor buttons These buttons move the cursor on the display INC amp DEC buttons The INC button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard The DEC button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard Parameter wheel The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the cur rently selected parameter or execute the shuttle and scrub operation By default it adjusts the value of the cur rently selected parameter The PR WHEEL MODE parameter indicates Prm USER DEFINED KEYS section 1 8 buttons You can assign one of 194 parameters to each of these but tons In particular if you assign any of 54 Remote Control parameters to these buttons you can operate the trans port section and select various Pro Tools modes from the 01V96i top panel For more information on assigning functions to keys refer to Using the User Defined Keys in the Owner s Manual separate booklet Parameter Function Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled mode The button indicator flashes while the transport section is stopped The indicator lights up when recording starts Starts playback from the current cur sor position DAW STOP Stops playback and recording DAW FF Fast forwards the cursor position 01 V96i Reference Manual OJ3u05 09 8 Remote Control DAW REW Fast rewinds the cursor position DAW
235. he output This shows the amount of gain GR meter reduction when the compressor 15 operating This shows the effect s input Level level or output level Use the meter METER IN OUT switches to choose which level is Shown 01 V96i Reference Manual Effects Parameters 143 Equalizer601 This emulates the characteristics of an analog equal izer of the 1970s By reproducing the distortion that is typical of analog circuits it adds drive to the sound This shows the effect s input Level level or output level Use the meter METER IN OUT switches to choose which level is shown These parameters control the LO LSH 1 LSH 2 shape of the frequency response HPF 1 HPF 2 curve for each filter band Q TYPE MID1 4 For the MID 1 4 bands you can 0 50 16 00 specify the sharpness of the LPF 1 LPF 2 frequency response curve HSH 1 HSH 2 For the LO and HI bands you can select one of four filter types 18 0 18 0 t0 18 0 dB 18 0 18 0 t0 18 0 dB us specify the gain of the fil ON OFF These switch each filter band on off Frequency response curve This resets the gain of all bands fs 44 1 48 kHz 16 0 20 0 kHz E These specify the center fre HI TYPE HSH 1 or quency of the filter HSH 2 HI Band 1 0 40 kHz This displays the total frequency response curve for all bands OpenDeck This emulates the tape compression produced by two open reel tape recorders
236. he parameter indicators are explained below _ INS CH1 INS CH32 Channel 1 32 Insert 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 01V96i Reference Manual 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library Refer to Libraries on page 74 for more information Patching the USB Outputs By default the following output signals are assigned to USB OUT USB OUT1 8 Bus Out 1 8 signals USB OUT9 16 Bus Out 1 8 signals If you want to change or verify this patching proceed as fol lows 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch USB Out page appears Initial Dota miseri Stile 2113 2114 Ei ER GI E 4 4 MAME IH LIB Fa OUT PATCH 3 The parameter boxes underneath each number indicate the currently assigned signal routing The meaning of these indicators are explained below INS CH1 INS CH32 Channels 1 32 Insert INS 51 1 5 BUS8 Bus Out 1 8 Insert Outs INS AUX1 INS Aux Out 1 8 Insert Outs INS ST L ST R Stereo Out Insert Outs 2 Move the cursor to a parameter box and use the Parameter wheel or INC DEC to modify the patching 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Output Patching 45 Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs Follow the s
237. hen rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value Tip The EQ settings for the ST IN Channels L R are linked to each other Youcan also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHAN NEL section to select the desired band and use the rotary controls to directly edit the and parameters see page 25 You can store the EQ settings in the EQ library which fea tures preset programs that can be used for various appli cations see page 147 01 V96i Reference Manual sjouueu andu 22 Input Channels Panning Input Channels Input Channels can be panned in the range of L63 through CENTER to R63 To pan each channel press the PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Pan page appears PAHS FUT Data STI STI3 5714 CHT 500 5 0920 0 PAN CENTER CENTER CEHTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER 949 CEHTER CENTER LE3 CENTER CENTER CEHTER CENTER D CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER RBA Move the cursor to the desired Pan control then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the value 1 Pan controls These knobs adjust the channel pan settings Press the ENTER button to reset the currently selected Pan control to center 2 MODE The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned There are three Pan modes as fol lows e INDIVI
238. his TOSLINK connector outputs an 8 channel ADAT optical format signal You can patch any Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct outs to this output page 44 SLOT This slot allows you to install an optional mini YGDAI Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface I O card This card offers AD DA conversion and various analog I O options and digital I O interfaces in all the popular digital audio inter connect formats including AES EBU ADAT and Tascam You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any Input Channels or Insert Ins see page 43 You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs see page 46 For details on the mini YGDAI I O cards that are currently usable refer to I O Slot Specifications in the Owners Man ual For the latest information about mini YGDAI I O cards refer to the Yamaha Professional Audio website http www yamahaproaudio com 01V96i Reference Manual 8 bojeuy 14 Analog amp Digital 1 Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 1 0 Card Inputs An optional MY8 AE96S Digital I O card features sampling rate converters so you can easily convert the sampling fre quency of digital inputs to the current 01V96i sampling rate 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears Use the buttons in the SRC sections to turn the sampling rate converters on and off You c
239. ig nals to Buses 1 8 the Stereo Bus and Aux Sends 1 8 There are two types of Input Channels each featuring slightly differ ent functions monaural Input Channels 1 32 and stereo ST IN Channels 1 4 Input Channels 1 32 Each of these monaural Input Channels features a phase effect gate compressor attenuator and EQ for signal pro cessing The following diagram illustrates the Input Channel 1 32 signal flow INPUT 1 32 METER ou METER PAN METER INSERT INSERT PA i ON LEVEL INPUT o PAN H 4 ATT HE DELAY H PAN Keyin 12 Group 1 12 13 24 LFE AUX 1 8 Gain Reduction Meter A PRE POST AUX 040 Ale INPUT PATCH e i 0 Self or Stereo Link 9 0 DIRECT OUT 1 32 Input Channels 1 32 feature the following parameters Phase This section switches the phase of input signals This dynamics processor can be used as a gate ducking e COMP Compressor This dynamics processor can be used as compressor expander or limiter The compressor can be pre EQ pre fader or post fader ATT Attenuator This section enables you to a
240. igned repeatedly selects one of seven edit tools eee Zoomer Trimmer Selector Grab ber Smart Tool Scrubber and Pen cil in this order DAW SHIFT ADD Functions in the same way as Macin tosh keyboard keys Shift Option PAW OFTON ALE Control and Alt Pressing one of the DAW buttons to which these functions CTRL CLUCH are assigned along with another button enables you to execute vari DAW ALT FINE ous commands DAW BANK Executes the Bank Swap operation Pressing the button to which this DAW BANK function is assigned switches the entire 16 channel bank DAW Channel Executes the Channel Scroll opera tion Pressing the buttons to which DAW Channel these functions are assigned enables you to scroll channels horizontally 01V96i Reference Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 89 Parameter DAW REC RDY 1 DAW REC RDY 2 DAW REC RDY 3 DAW REC RDY 4 DAW REC RDY 5 DAW REC RDY Pressing the buttons to which these DAW REC RDY 7 functions are assigned places the DAW REC RDY 8 COrresponding channel strips Record Ready mode At this time DAW REC RDY 9 the indicator of the button you DAW REC RDY 10 pressed flashes It lights up when DAW REC RDY 11 recording starts DAW REC RDY 12 DAW REC RDY 13 DAW REC RDY 14 DAW REC RDY 15 DAW REC RDY 16 If no channel strips are in Record Enabled mode pressing the button to which this function is assigned places all chan
241. ing Consoles 111 Cascading Consoles The 01V96i features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade con nection You can connect two 01V96is in cascade using digital inputs and outputs or the OMNI IN and OMNI OUT connectors In this way two consoles work just like one big console integrating each units Buses 1 8 Aux Sends 1 8 Stereo Bus and Solo Bus The following functions are linked between two cascaded 01 9615 via the MIDI IN and OUT ports Display page selection Solo function Fader Mode e Metering Position Peak Hold On Off Meter Fast Fall on off Scene Store Recall and Title Edit Tip link functions and parameters excluding the Solo func tion turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box on the Setup Prefer1 page see page 109 The Solo function is always linked regardless of the status of the Cascade COMM Link check box The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade connection using two 01V96is and the inputs and outputs of the digital I O card installed in the slot of each 01V96i 1 Install digital 1 O cards into the slot on each of two 01V96is 2 Connect two 01V96is as follows e Connect the digital I O card output on the transmitting 01V96i slave to the digital I O card input on the receiv ing 01V96i master Connect IN connector on the master unit to the ADAT OUT connector on the slave unit Connect the MIDI IN port on the ma
242. ing adjusted pops up See page 21 for more information on EQ On the 01V96i you can pair adjacent odd even Input Chan luna Wate nels or counterpart channels Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share EDIT sk QJ the same physical fader Faders and most parameters of paired HORD CLOCK SELECT channels are linked for stereo operation Paired channels linked parameters and non linked parameters that are avail OLIT 172 374 5 6 9710 E able for independent control are listed below emp TS Linked parameters Non linked parameters NE n SEL buttons Input patches Insert patches Channel on off Output patches Insert on off Comp insert position Solo Safe Delay on off FORMAT PREFER PREFERS 22 Aux on off Delay time Aux Send level Delay feedback 1 Pressing and holding down the button selected in Step 2 resets Aux Sends as Pre or Post Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL HIGH and LOW Comp settings Pan Follow Pan buttons simultaneously resets the Q frequency and gain for Fader group Aux Send pan Recall Safe You can set this parameter for each channel indepen dently if the GANG button is turned off on the INS DLY DLY page You can set this parameter for each channel indepen dently on the EQ ATT page but the paired channel set tings are linked on the EQ Edit and View pages
243. ing modes that determine how signals are sent Fixed Aux Send levels are fixed and Variable Aux Send levels are variable e GLOBAL The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels for the selected Aux to pre fader or post fader simultaneously PRE POINT The PRE POINT PRE ON and POST ON buttons enable you to set the pre fader channels to pre on before the ON button or post on after the ON button 01V96i Reference Manual Note In Fixed mode Aux Send ON OFF buttons appear instead of the Aux Send rotary controls PRE POST buttons GLOBAL PRE POST buttons and PRE POINT PRE Setting Aux Send Levels 39 4 If you switched to Fixed mode in Step 3 the ON OFF buttons turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently selected Aux Send ON POST ON These ON OFF buttons turn on or off each Input Channel for the currently selected Aux Send Initial llata 2111 5112 STIS 5114 EXE ER NODE 3 Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE 6 7 8 button in the MODE section for the cur rently selected Aux Send to select mode E Fixed Mode Lb In this mode Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal SOT 21 24 0 0 dB Also channel ON OFF buttons appear instead of the Send level rotary controls and PRE POST buttons zu 31 3 4 7 A GE 09 Note In Fixed mode the Aux On Off parameters for paired Input Channels
244. ix Parameter Lists gr Preset Gate Parameters imp _ RANG PEAKING 45 441 MID ag Female Vo 2 ane e PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING amp Te eson ee ly 2124 160 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING HSHELF M 3 A Dr BD UJ e TET sow ur uu 2 REARING EEA N Threshold dB 8 Total EQ 3 Ts A Dr SN UJ UJ F 7 90 150 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING nene 315 Hz 425 wiz 20 0 Kz ESHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Snare Drums F 4 25 nz 40048 PEAKING PEAKING 12 gt 17012 ee PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF anos 475 236 100182 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING ESHELF ano o Toonz 400 Hz 670 kez 12 5 wiz CEER C PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 670 wiz seo KHz on ESHELF PEAKING PEAKING F 75 10054 4 00 12 5 wi PEAKING PEAKING PEAKIN
245. ks in unison with the Compare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends windows e BYPASS Turning on this button bypasses the plug ins see page 92 e INSERT PARAM Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign plug ins using four rotary controls on the page Switching this button to PARAM enables you to adjust the plug in parameters using the four rotary controls see page 91 Information box This box displays plug in parameter names values alarm messages from Pro Tools etc Rotary controls 1 4 These controls enable you to select plug ins or adjust the selected plug in parameters 01V96i Reference Manual Channel Display mode F3 button Press the F3 button to select this display mode in which the parameter controls for tracks 1 16 are displayed B STI1 STIz STIS STIA EDITI 1 EA eE COUMTER E SELECT ASS 16H NE O TIME CODE O FEET a ear OOO 1000 1 4 T 5 a a a a Rudi Rud5 Rud amp Rud 3 11 15 14 15 15 Auda Adii Adiz Adis 8915 Adio Drug SETUP Initial Data STIL STIT 00 Parameter controls 1 16 Channel parameter controls such as channel 1 16 pan pots Send A E send levels etc are displayed Meter Display mode F4 button Press the F4 button to select this display mode in which the level meters for tracks 1 16 are dis
246. l Surface AD Input Section p 7 SCENE MEMORY Section p 9 DISPLAY ACCESS Section p 8 4 48V gt gt gt 2TR 10dBV UNBAL ge Monitor Out m amp Q o m 2 5 5 5 2 o m 2 5 o m 2 5 o m 2 5 2 2 2 5 2 S 2 o m 2 M 5 y E m 7 1 peak peak peak peak peak peak peak peak oO alt QO Ol Y i SIGNAL SIGNAL AL SIGNAL C C C m DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE SCENE MEMORY STORE Y 4 SOLO Section mE p 9 ETE 5 FADER MODE YAMAHA INSERT __ PAIR PATCH SELECTED CHANNEL Section p 8 7 INC cae Display Section D AUX2 AUXA p 9 5 X m Data Entry uc Section p 9 AUX5 AUX 6 AUX7 AUX 8 4 SELECTED LAYER Section p 8 CHANNEL Section p 9 wre E
247. left channel DELAY Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY High pass filter cutoff frequency Low pass filter cutoff frequency 1 Fe Do ddd D 4 d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Used in conjunction with TEMPO MOD DELAY to determine FB DLY One input two output basic repeat delay with mod 1 R k bh JIZ hJ de d 4 ulation Maximum value depends on the tempo setting DELAY 00 27250 ms Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 9910 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed THRU High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with 1 TEMPO to determine DELAY Used in conjunction with 2 MOD NOTE TEMPO to determine FREQ ffi H3 h d ded d 5 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 HH BI ded 3 on Low pass filter cutoff frequency 01 V96i Reference Manual 51511 xipuaddy 134 Appendix Parameter Lists ECHO FLANGE Two input two output stereo delay with crossed Two input two output flange effect FREQ 0 05 40 00Hz Modulation speed FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN _99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus va
248. ll subsequently added chan nels xdi After all desired channels are added to the link edit the EQ or compressor parameters for one of the linked channels The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are applied to the rest of the linked channels 01 V96i Reference Manual sJ9jouueJeg bunjur 9 sjauueyD 64 Internal Effects Internal Effects This chapter describes how to use the 01V96i s internal effects processors About the Internal Effects The 01V96i features four internal multi effects processors These effects processors offer numerous types of effects including reverbs delays modulation based effects and combination effects designed especially for use with sur round sound Note When the 01V96i operates at a high sampling frequency 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz you can use only Effects processors 1 and 2 Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources For example effects processor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends and output to ST IN Channels effects send return Effects processors can also be inserted into Input Channels Bus Outs Aux Outs or the Stereo Out Effects processors 1 through 4 create 1 in 2 out or 2 in 2 out effects AUX1 8 INSERT OUT INPUT PATCH The 01V96i also features the Effects library which contains 56 preset programs including Add On Effects and 72 user pro grams Using Effects Processors via Aux
249. lues for reverse phase feed back FB DIYR 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time WAVE Modulation waveform Left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feed reverse phase feedback 100 Hz 8 00 knz 80 peaking type frequency 100 010 TEQ peaking type bandwidth 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 99 to 99 Right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 99 to 99 Left to right channel feedback gain plus values for nor mal phase feedback minus val ues for reverse phase feedback Right to left channel feedback gain plus values for nor mal phase feedback minus val 3 E 2 ues for reverse phase feedback o S Be dP 141144 de HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz 2 Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 to determine DELAY Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Used in conjunction with TEMPO SOTE TPR to determine FB DLY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency NOTET BREI to determine FB DLY R 12 0to 12 0 dB peaking type gain 1 8 9 PP B MP de d d d deos EQQ 10 0010 peaking type bandwidth CHORUS Two input two output chorus effec
250. mat The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01001000 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm 11110111 FO 43 2n 7 4 40 20 20 38 43 39 33 48 mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump H 0 128 Channel Library 0 128 256 Current data End of exclusive 2 8 2 25 Input patch library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 0 Library no 0 32 Library no 32 256 current input patch data 8192 UNDO For reception by the 01V96i only the user area is valid 1 32 256 8192 STATUS ID NO SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010010 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm Ottttttt Obbbbbbb 11110111 FO 43 On 7 ch cl 4 40 20 20 38 43 29 33 52 mh ml tt bb ds de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count
251. mat 177 2 8 2 13 Program change table bulk dump format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010000 00000010 00000000 Ottttttt Obbbbbbb Oddddddd 11110111 FO 43 On 7 1 4 40 20 20 38 43 39 33 50 02 00 tt bb ds de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl No 256 Current total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Program change table data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 14 Program change table bulk dump request format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010000 00000010 00000000 11110111 FO 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 50 02 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump No 256 Current End of exclusive 2 8 2 15 Equalizer library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of th
252. meter to three Control Change numbers and select TIME LOW TIME MID and TIME HIGH for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the second middle PARAMETER column peut ute RE i IN DECAY HIGHIDIMPUT 58 22 2 IN DELAY MID INPUT 1 58 2 DELAY TIME LOW IMPUT 1 ae 7 ASST GH Note Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128 steps require an appropriate combination of range parame ters for successful MIDI Control Change Tip You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to display the MIDI Setup page then specify MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels 9o Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON OFF and Rx ON OFF buttons 01V96i parameters will now be set accordingly when the 01V96i receives corresponding Control Changes Also when you adjust parameters on the 01V96i the 01V96i will transmit corresponding Control Changes Note Before controlling parameters using Control Changes make sure that both Tx and Rx ON OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row on the MIDI Setup page are turned off Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes You can control 01V96i parameters in real time by using Parameter Change messages that are System Exclusive mes sages instead of usi
253. meters on the display Tip Refer to Input amp Output Patching on page 43 for more information on how to set inserts Attenuating the Stereo Out and Bus Out To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F4 button to display the EQ Out Att page On this page you can attenuate the Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 and Stereo Out signals Initial Data m STI STI2 STI3 5714 1 1 6 1 EET OUTPUT ATTENUATOR Bus 1 z 3 4 5 a de dE 288 892 AdE AL 4 BBdE Bde Bde Bde dE STEREO dB The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 20 Delaying the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 signals press the INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the INS DLY page appears gi 5112 5113 2114 EDIT EE HSZ DLY Initial Data CHi CHi 00 EDIT DELAY DELAY SCALE peg BUS y x Boc 24 v v 6 prr Ger oer i GER oer GEE oer msecl G G G G a a samfe a a a ALIX 2 5 3 9 3 amp c amp 3 55 msecl a a G G G G G G zamre a a a a STEREO msec zamrie The parameter
254. mm ml number Low DATA Ottttttt tt attribute protect 0x0001 normal 0x0000 11110111 F7 End of exclusive number 0 99 0 response only function SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x00 2 8 3 15 Parameter request Function call attribute Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH 01 V96i Reference Manual MIDI Data Format 183 Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS ID No SUB STATUS 0011 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 11110000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0000 Of attribute Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive 2 8 3 16 Parameter change Function call link Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified Transmission Inresponse to a request a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH If Parame
255. mp260 260 This emulates the characteristics of a compressor limiter of the mid 1970s that has now become a standard for live sound reinforcement Comp260S 2605 This is a stereo model Comp260 Equalizer601 EQUALIZER601 This emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s 50 OpenDeck OPENDECK This is a mastering effect that emulates the tape compression produced by two open reel tape recorders a recording deck and a reproduction deck REV X HALL REV X reverb provides high density richly reverberant sound quality with REV X Room REV X ROOM smooth decay spaciousness and depth that enhance the original sound Plate REV X PLATE Three types are available hall room and plate 54 Max100 MAX100 This emulates a vintage phaser effect that was manufactured only during the second half of the 1970s 55 Vintage Phaser PHASER Rather than limiting itself to reproducing any particular model this phaser offers an extremely high level of freedom in creating phaser sounds Dual Phaser DUAL PHASER This phaser emulates a vintage effect manufactured during the mid 1970s 01V96i Reference Manual Using Libraries 79 Gate Library The Gate library enables you to store and recall Input Channel gate settings The library contains four preset memories and 124 user readable amp writable memories Follow the steps below to use the Gate library 1 Press the DISPL
256. n begins adjusting the motor fader movement and the 01V96i displays a message that indicates the calibra tion operation is in progress The calibration operation takes about two minutes DO NOT touch the faders during the operation 01V96i Reference Manual 4 19430 114 Other Functions 11 If there is any problem with the calibration result the 01V96i displays the following win dow 5 When the calibration operation is complete the 01V96i displays a window in which you can select faders for position adjustment If you selected 2 FADER MOVE in Step 3 the fader adjustment is complete The 01V96i starts in nor mal mode Also the channel SEL button indicator of a problematic fader flashes 91496 FADER CALIBRATION Calibration Data is Hot Correct CONTINUE 2 START FROH THE BEGINNING 3 QUIT RH THR Y 91496 FADER CALIBRATION Select FADER lina SEL Keys and Fress ENTER to Start Calibration Press ENTER to Execute Use the cursor buttons to select one of the following three options then press ENTER 6 Use the channel SEL buttons to select faders for which you wish to calibrate the position then press ENTER The selected channel SEL button indicators flash When you press ENTER they light up steadily At the beginning all SEL buttons are flashing
257. n will in some cases change if the same bank is being used STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010101 00000000 Obbbbbbb Obbbbbbb Oddddddd 11110111 43 1 4 40 20 20 38 43 39 33 55 00 ds de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl b 0 3 bank no 1 4 total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number User assignable layer data of block bb ee Invert L 4 de 1 amp Ox7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010101 00000000 Obbbbbbb 11110111 FO 43 2n 4 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 55 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump E b 0 3 bank no 1
258. nel is panned hard left or right Fast Meter Fall Time If this check box is on the level meters fall more quickly DIO Warning If this check box is on a warning message appears when any errors are detected in digital audio signals received at the Slot or 2TR Digital Inputs MIDI Warning If this check box is on a warning message appears when any errors are detected in the incoming MIDI messages Initial Data Nominal If this check box is on Input Channel faders and ST IN Channel level controls are set to nominal 0 dB when you recall Scene 0 If this check box is off they are set to Scene MEM Auto Update If this check box is on you can use the Scene Memory Auto Update function see page 70 Cascade COMM Link If this check box is on various functions and parameters are linked between cascaded 01V96is See page 111 for more information on cascade connection When the check box is off only the Solo function is linked Auto Direct Out On If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct Out destination from to any other output the channel Direct Out is automatically enabled If you change the channel Direct Out destination from an output to the channel Direct Out is automatically disabled 01 V96i Reference Manual suonounj 19430 110 Other Functions Routing ST Pair Link When this check box is checked paired channels routing to the Stereo Bus will be li
259. nel strips in Record Enabled mode The button indicator flashes if any channel strip in any bank is in Record Enabled mode Pressing the button while the button indicator is flashing cancels Record Enabled mode for all channel strips DAW REC RDY ALL Selecting Channels To select a single Pro Tools channel press the SEL button that corresponds to the desired channel To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously while holding down one SEL button press the SEL buttons of the other channels you wish to add Press the SEL buttons again to cancel the selection Setting Channel Levels 1 Make sure that the FADER MODE HOME button indicator is lit steadily If the indicator is flashing press the HOME button to turn on the button indicator 2 Operate the faders to set channel levels Press and hold down the AUX 6 button and press the desired SEL button to reset the corresponding channel fader level Muting Channels To mute Pro Tools channels press the ON buttons The ON button indicators of muted channels turn off Grouped channels are muted together Press the ON buttons again to unmute channels The ON button indicators of unmuted channels light up There are two mute modes in Pro Tools Implicit mute and Explicit mute You can check the mute mode by viewing the ON button indicators Implicit mute This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are muted because other chann
260. nels 1 Select an internal Effects processor 1 4 then recall the desired effect programs 2 Press the SEL button of the Input Channel or Output Channel into which you want to insert the selected effects Tip Repeatedly pressing the STEREO SEL button toggles between the left and right Stereo Bus channels 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the Ins Dly Insert page appears IHS DLY Initial Data F r1 STI2 STIS 2114 CH5 CHS 00 GI p Reim 14 POST FADER FACER n IHSERT 01 V96i Reference Manual JeuJe1u 66 Internal Effects 4 Select the effect insertion position using the INSERT button in the POSITION section 5 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box in the INSERT section then select the inputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1 FX1 1 amp FX1 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Pro cessor 1 FX2 1 amp FX2 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Pro cessor 2 FX3 1 amp FX3 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Pro cessor 3 FX4 1 amp FX4 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Pro cessor 4 6 Press ENTER to confirm the setting 7 Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in the INSERT section select the outputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1 then press ENTER to confirm the setting 8 Move the cursor to the ON OFF button in the INSERT section then press
261. nformation on Sur round pan 3 BUS ROUTING FOLLOW PAN section BUS ROUTING This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the selected channel When the D button is turned on the channel signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the parameter box below the button The D button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels e FOLLOW PAN This button determines whether the Input Channels Pan setting is applied to the paired Bus Outs Follow Pan function When the button is turned off the Follow Pan function is disabled and an identical signal is sent to the paired Bus Outs In surround mode it also determines whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs 4 AUX section e AUX These controls set the currently selected Input Channel s Aux Send 1 8 levels and positions See page 36 for more information on Aux Sends 5 Meter section Meters These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel e PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER The metering position is displayed below the meters 6 GROUP section FADER MUTE EQ COMP These buttons indicate which Fader Mute EQ or Comp group if any the currently selected Input Channel is in If the channel is in a group the group number appears If the channel is not in a group appears The compres sor is unavailable for the ST IN Channels 01V96i Reference Manual Setting the Input Channels from Con
262. ng MIDI Control Changes See MIDI Data Format at the end of this Manual for detailed information on available Parameter Changes 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI mes sages see page 101 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the exter nal device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to display the MIDI Setup page then turn off the Tx and Rx ON OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row The 01V96i will now set certain parameter values when it receives corresponding Parameter Changes Also when you adjust certain parameters on the 01V96i it transmits corresponding Parameter Changes Note Before controlling parameters using Parameter Changes make sure that both Tx and Rx ON OFF buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE row are turned off 01V96i Reference Manual Transmitting Parameter Settings MIDI Bulk Dump 107 Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI Bulk Dump You can back up data stored in 01V96i such as libraries and Scenes to an external MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk Dump In this way you can later restore previous 01V96i set tings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the 01V96i Note Some of the data transmitted from the 01V96i to the sequen
263. ng and available pair partner The following display page is an example in 6 1 Surround mode IP wx Initial 5111 1 STI3 5114 Initial lata EDIT i 00 LIME i F Cy i gt Rig The following parameters are available this page 1 Surround pan graph This graph indicates the pan positions in a two dimen sional field with the listening position in the center A small diamond 4 indicates the current surround pan position You can move the current surround pan posi tion directly to one of speaker icons select ing its icon then pressing ENTER 2 Trajectory patterns These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that determine how the surround pan moves when you oper ate the Parameter wheel or the INC DEC buttons 3 FAST Turning on this button increases the speed of sound images panned via the Parameter wheel 4 Trajectory pattern parameters These parameters fine tune the surround pan trajectory pattern WIDTH This parameter sets the left to right width of the selected trajectory pat tern DEPTH This parameter sets the front to rear width of the selected trajectory pat tern OFFSET This parameter offsets the left to right direction of the selected trajectory pattern OFFSET T
264. nked Prefer2 page The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated on the display and adjust the display brightness SETUP Initial Data Belli STI2 5113 5114 cii eu 9 G 63 Short Channel 107 Channel E channel 10 ALL FADER This page contains the following parameters 1 Channel ID Channel This parameter selects a style for the displayed channel If the Channel ID check box is selected the Channel ID appears e g CH1 CH16 AUX1 If the Channel Short Name check box is on the Channel Short name appears 2 Channel Copy Parameter This parameter selects the channel parameters to be cop ied when you assign the Channel Copy function to one of the User Defined buttons You can select multiple options eee reer This button selects all parameters that can be copied When you turn on this button all other options are cancelled Copies the fader values Copies on off status of the ON buttons e Copies pan settings Copies surround settings Copies Aux Send levels AUX Copies the on off status of the Chan nel to Aux signals Copies EQ parameter values 3 Display Brightness This parameter sets the brightness of the LED indicators in the range of 1 through 4 Crea
265. nstalled in the slot The data is not transmitted if a valid plug in effect card is not installed STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 7 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA 01001110 4E Ommmmmmm mh m 0 SLOT 1 Ommmmmmm ml BLOCK INFO Obbbbbbb bh Obbbbbbb bl ttttttt th Ottttttt t1 00001111 01 00001111 01 00003333 0j Product id High 00003333 0j Product id Low current block number 0 total block number total block number minimum number is 0 Developer id High Developer id Low DATA Oddddddd ds Plug in Effect card memory data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 30 Plug in effect card bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the slot number See above STATUS 11110000 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C 71 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111
266. ntrol Change message Tip You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the Stu dio Manager software 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI mes sages see page 101 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F3 button The MIDI Ctl Asgn page appears This page enables you to assign 01V96i parameters to Control Changes MIDI Initial Data mierisrzsrs3sra4 EDIT sae 13 FADER H CHANNEL IHFLIT 13 FADER CHANNEL IMFUT 5 4 13 FADER CHANNEL IHFLIT 4 13 FADER H CHANNEL 3 13 FADER CHANNEL IHFLIT 2 13 7 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 1 Cet t Ass GH did Tip See page 157 for information on the default Parameter to Control Change assignments 4 Move the cursor to the MODE parameter s TABLE button 1 then press ENTER The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages are transmitted when 01V96i parameters are adjusted The following options are available for the MODE parameter TABLE MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accor dance with th
267. ntur 8 Levels ccn tamen eS 33 38 EB otis ios 56 74 Channel 75 Compressor library 79 library tese nete 76 81 Gate 79 General operation 74 Input patch library 75 Output patch library 76 EMR e p 59 COIDIesSOfS 62 BO soda 62 EOW 9 LOW MID button 9 M NLBAND DYNA 142 Machine control 98 MASTER 8 Max 144 Meters Stereo meters esee ne 9 84 100 Bulk quip 107 Bulk dump messages 100 Control changes 104 Data fortliat ace aed 173 FADER BT sudden eis 106 Initial parameter to control change table 157 MIDI IN THRU OUT ports 10 100 MIDI note on off 100 Parameter changes 106 Parameters 104 Program changes 103 Scene memory to program change table 156 101 SLOT 100 System exclusive messages 100 Transmission and Reception 102 ISB DORE 100 MIDI Bulk page 107 MIDI Ctl Asgn page
268. o the Tx CH STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010000 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm 11110111 FO 43 10 mh ml ch cl F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Function call function number High number Low channel High channel Low End of exclusive 01V96i Reference Manual IAIN XIpu ddy 182 Appendix MIDI function number tx rx channel 1 SCENE RECALL 0x00 0 99 8192 256 tx rx EQ LIB RECALL 0x01 1 200 8192 0 513 tx rx GATE LIB RECALL 0x02 1 128 8192 0 95 tx rx COMP LIB RECALL 0x03 1 128 8192 0 513 tx rx EFF LIB RECALL 0x04 1 128 8192 0 3 tx rx CHANNEL LIB RECALL 0x06 0 128 8192 0 513 tx rx INPATCH LIB RECALL 0x07 0 32 8192 256 tx rx OUTPATCH LIB RECALL 0x08 0 32 8192 256 tx rx SCENE STORE 0x20 1 99 256 16383 tx rx EQ LIB STORE 0x21 41 200 0 513 16383 tx rx GATE LIB STORE 0x22 5 128 0 31 16383 tx rx COMP LIB STORE 0x23 37 128 0 513 16383 tx rx EFF LIB STORE 0x24 xx 2 128 0 3 16383 tx rx CHANNEL LIB STORE 0x26 1 128 0 513 16383 tx rx INPATCH LIB STORE 0x27 1 32 256 16383 tx rx 5 0 28 1 32 256 16383 tx rx 1 0 CH1 31 CH32 32 ST INTL 39 ST IN4R 128 BUS1 135 BUS8
269. of the counter is specified in Pro Tools The following three check boxes in the COUNTER section indicate the currently selected format e TIME CODE Pro Tools timecode format is set to Time Code e FEET Pro Tools timecode format is set to Feet Frames e BEATS Pro Tools timecode format is set to Bars Beats If no check boxes are selected Pro Tools timecode format is set to Minutes Seconds or Samples 3 SELECT ASSIGN This parameter indicates the current parameter which can be adjusted via the parameter controls on the page For example Pan PanR SndA SndB SndC SndD or SndE see page 87 4 P WHEEL This parameter indicates the function currently assigned to the Parameter wheel see page 87 01V96i Reference Manual 86 Remote Control 5 INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section This section enables you to insert plug ins into Pro Tools channels and adjust plug in settings Use the left and right lt gt Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters displayed in this section HSERT ASS 16M EDIT ASSI GH COMPARE BYPHS2S HSERT rHaHHF 1 e ASSIGN Turn on this button to insert plug ins into Pro Tools channels If you are using the TDM system you can also assign outboard effects processors e COMPARE You can compare your edits with the original settings by turning on this button This button wor
270. om actual data into bulk data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data b 0 0 for I20 1 lt 7 1 if d I amp 0x80 b 0 1 lt lt 6 1 j b I 1 d I amp Ox7F j Restoration from bulk data into actual data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data for 0 1 lt 7 1 b 0 lt lt lt 1 d I b I 1 0x80 amp b 0 j 2 8 2 1 Scene memory bulk dump format compress The 01V96i can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form STATUS 11110000 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4C 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01101101 6D m Ommmmmmm mh m 0 99 256 8192 5 0 99 EDIT BUFFER UNDO 01 V96i Reference Manual MIDI Data Format 175 BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX Ommmmmmm Obbbbbbb 11110111 ml tt bb ds de ee F7 Receive is effective 1 99 256 8192 total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Scene data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 2 Scene memory bulk dump
271. on venient when you want to attenuate output signals quickly ENTER regardless of the source signal patching The buses or Aux Sends are paired 2 Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button for the desired Bus or Aux Send then press 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but 3 To cancel a pair move the cursor to the STE ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Output REO button for the desired Bus or Aux Send Att page appears then press ENTER DIOZSE UPI A A Initial Data ml 112 113 5114 EDIT 3 C 1 OUTPUT PORT ATTENUATOR PORT OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 MONITOR OUT OUT L STEREO OUT IHITIALIZE Fal SURH fi CASCADE OUTPUT 2 Move the cursor in the left column 1 then scroll the list up or down using the Parameter wheel to select the desired output or slot channel for which you want to adjust attenu ation The following outputs and slot channels can be selected STEREO OUT L R STEREO OUTL amp R channels MONITOR OUT L R MONITOR OUTL amp R channels OMNI OUT 1 4 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 SLOT OUT 1 1 through 1 16 RUSSE Slot channels 1 16
272. on This button is used primarily when two 01V96is are connected in cas cade gt 3 TRANSMIT Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to transmit data specified in the CATEGORY section to an external MIDI device 4 INTERVAL This parameter specifies the interval between data pack ets during bulk transmission in 50 millisecond steps If the external device drops part of the bulk data increase this parameter value In the CATEGORY section move the cursor to the button of the data type you want to trans mit then press ENTER The following options are available e ALL This button selects all data available for bulk dump When this button is turned on all other buttons in this section are turned off e SCENEMEM This button selects Scene memories You can select Scenes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button e LIBRARY This button selects libraries You can select the type of library in the TYPE parameter box next to the button then specify the library number in the parameter box on the right e BANK This parameter enables you to select the User Defined Key banks KEYS UDEF User Defined Remote Layer banks RMT or User Assignable Layer banks USR LAYER for bulk dump You can select one of these three types in the parameter box next to the button and select the banks in the parameter box on the right e SETUPMEM This button selects the 01V96i setup data 1
273. on preset 15 using a deep threshold to change the overall attack and level 17 E Guitar COMP Compressor for electric guitar cutting or arpeggio style backing The sound color can be varied by playing different styles COMP Compressor for acoustic guitar stroke or arpeggio style backing COMP Compressor for use with strings COMP A variation on preset 19 intended for violas or cellos Strings3 COMP A variation on preset 20 intended for string instruments with a very low range such as Un cellos or contrabass the tones could diffuse such as synth pad Intended to prevent diffusion of the sound A variation on preset 24 intended for sampled bass drum sounds Solo Vocal2 COMP A variation on preset 28 COMP A variation on preset 28 intended for choruses Click Erase EXPAND eran for removing a click track that may bleed through from a musician s head COMPAND H Hard kneed compander for reducing the level of the music when an announcer speaks COMPAND S A soft kneed compander with a slow release COMP peak stop compressor 35 Total Comp1 COMP Compressor for reducing the overall volume level Use it on the stereo output during mixdown or with paired Input or Output Channels Total Comp2 COMP A variation on preset 35 but with more compression 01 V96i Reference Manual Using Libraries 31 EQ Library 1 CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently selected channel This library enables
274. only memories to which you cannot store Scenes Also you cannot store Scenes to write protected Scene memories dd Press the SCENE MEMORY STORE button The Title Edit window appears which enables you to name the Scene to be stored Tip You can disable this window by turning the Store Con firmation parameter to Off on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page see page 109 In this case the stored Scene will hve the same name as the one recalled most recently gt Enter the title the cursor to but ton then press ENTER The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory di To recall a Scene press the SCENE MEMORY Up orDown V buttons to select a Scene memory number then press the SCENE MEMORY RECALL button Tip If you turn the Recall Confirmation parameter to On on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page a Scene recall confirmation window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled see page 109 Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the Scene Memory Page On the Scene Memory page you can store recall write pro tect delete and edit the titles of Scenes 1 Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96i to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Scene page appears aeni 5112 5113 5114 CH1 CHI Ex 2 Free 99 PATCH LINK TITLE IH
275. onv Digital Digital converter and signal processing device Magnetic tape device and mag Magnete netic disk device D Broadcast Digital broadcast reception Musical instrument micro Instruments phone and sources that gener ate string signals A D Conv A D converter without copy right information A D converter with copyright A D Conv with C Solid Memory Solid memory device Experimental Experimental device Unknown Note AES EBU appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3 AES EBU Professional format signals that do not include Category Code Bit 6 COPY Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2 S PDIF Consumer for mat signals OK appears if copying is allowed Pro hibit appears if copy protected 3 If you select the SLOT 101 885 W3 16 button for a slot that 21728 Ex has an MY16 AE card installed use the 01 08 and 09 16 buttons located in the lower right corner of the screen to select a channel group you wish to display Dithering Digital Outputs 15 Dithering Digital Outputs When digital audio is transferred to lower resolution systems truncated bits may generate unpleasant noise To cancel the audible effect of this noise a small complement of noise is intentionally added to the digital outputs This process is called dithering On the 01V96i you can dither the 2TR Digital Out
276. or Input Channels or Output Channels This function enables you to set EQ or compressor parameters for multiple channels to the same values simultaneously 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until one of the following pages appears In EQ page This page enables you to set EQ links a d for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 PAIRS GRUP Initial Data 5112 713 5114 CH6 CH6 G G 00000 INPUT EQUALIZER LINE I HPLIT E 18 11 12 15 14 1E 16 12 19 20 21 22 2214 E 2025 E 4 OUT FADER EX OUT MUTE 3 e Out EQ page This page enables you to set EQ links e h for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out Initial lata EDIT Eh OUTPUT EQUALIZER LINK 1 zz d T 1 4 E geni 112 5113 5114 um 020 00 00 0 E 4 OUT FADER EX OUT MUTE fA IH EG 5 01V96i Reference Manual Linking and Compressor Parameters 63 e In Comp page This page enables you to set Compressor links 1 1 for Input Channels 1 32 Initial ata 501 502 113 2114 INPUT CORP 12 18 13 2122 22 44 HTS OUT This page enables you to set Compressor links m p for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out Initial Data I STI1 5712 STIS STIA XI 4 4 G 0 OUTPUT LIME 1 E
277. p Master o ated 62 Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters 62 internal Effects 64 About Internal Effects io ausu ttn 64 Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends 64 Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels 65 Editi EN chek D OO aU d 66 About Add On aein 67 PROV CE MUG TS rece hs 67 Scene Memories 68 About SCENE iet 68 68 Scene Number scd eia oot Druid ain 68 Storing and Recalling Scenes an ERR 69 Auto Scene Memory Update xoa entornos 70 71 Recalling Scenes 72 deo rco ei bee ite 72 Copying and Pasting a Scene Global 73 e 74 About tine eS 74 General library ada 74 eed UE 75 Remote Control omnt 83 About Remote Puneo subdito E 83 Pro Tools Remote Layer cect omen eta a 83 Nuendo Cubase Remote 93 Other DAW Remote 94 Eye f doeet ROME RUE 94 Machine Control teen 98 MID vcre 100 MIDI bibis 100 IV
278. parameters are related Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calcu late a value that will be the basis for the tempo and contin ues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY or FREQ This means that when TEMPO NOTE and DELAY or FREQ are synchronized and you change any of these values the other parameters will be re set in order to maintain the cor rect relationship The parameters that are re set and the cal culation method a used are as follows If you turn SYNC on gt NOTE will be set If you edit DELAY or FREQ NOTE will be set In this case the NOTE value is calculated as follows NOTE DELAY or FREQ 4 x 60 TEMPO If you edit NOTE DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO If you edit TEMPO DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ original DELAY or FREQ x previous TEMPO new TEMPO The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values Example 1 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms TEMPO 120 you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY new NOTE x 4 x 60 TEMPO 1 4 x 4 x 60 120 0 5 sec 500 ms Thus the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms Example 2 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms NOTE 8th note you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY ori
279. pera tion of channel ON buttons the 01V96i features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped channels using the Master Mute buttons in a manner similar to using a mute group on an analog mixing console While this function is enabled the ON buttons for grouped chan nels will not be linked 1 After you perform Step 5 in Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups on page 59 use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT MUTE MASTER check box or OUTPUT MUTE MAS TER check box then press ENTER to turn on the Mute Group Master function PAIRS GRUP Initial Data 2111 2112 51713 5714 CHA CHA 00 mmi C9 QJ 2 INPUT MUTE MASTER 12 34 EET 156 11 12 12 14 1E 16 12 ENABLE HALTER ooo 2 4 4 4 J mim ZEAE 24 Pppp I m m zT m mim E 7770 EU miim TZT r xL uozzrxc 2 When the Mute Master check box is checked use the group MASTER MUTE buttons to mute or unmute the groups If channels are muted via the Mute Master function the channel ON button indicators flash It is useful if you assign the MASTER MUTE buttons to USER DEFINED KEYS buttons Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters f
280. played DID SETUPICYC Initial Data lolli 5112 STI3 STI4 STiL STIi XI E TARGET COWUMTER SELECT AS51GH a O TIME CODE a OOO 1000 Audi Aud Rud3 Rudd Aude Aud Aud Audg Adii Adiz Adis Adit Adis 916 e Channels 1 16 The channel 1 16 levels or Send levels are displayed Pro Tools Remote Layer 87 Control Surface Operation When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected the 01V96i con trols on the top panel engage the following functions Channel Strip section SEL buttons These buttons select Pro Tools channels inserts and Automation mode SOLO buttons These buttons solo Pro Tools channels The button indi cators for the soloed channels light up ON buttons These buttons mute Pro Tools channels Faders The faders set Pro Tools channel levels including the audio tracks MIDI tracks master fader Aux Ins etc If 16 or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools faders are assigned starting from the left most channel FADER MODE Section AUX 5 buttons These buttons select Sends A E so that you can adjust the corresponding Pro Tools channel send level AUX 6 button Press and hold down this button and press the desired SEL button to reset the corresponding channel fader level Move the cursor to the parameter control on the display then press and hold down this button and press ENTER to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center
281. plays Input Channels 1 32 Insert In Patches 7 To enable the specified Insert patch move the cursor to the ON OFF button in the INSERT section and press ENTER to turn it on or off 2 Move the cursor to a channel patch parame ter box you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change 4 To view the Output Channels Insert Ins press the PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Output Ins page appears Initial mier 112 STIS 5114 1 ERE Ek ER GI GI QUTPLIT INSERAT PATCH Assisn 2 OUTA TR BUT NAME H Fj 5 Move the cursor to a channel patch parame ter box you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 6 Press ENTER to confirm the change 01V96i Reference Manual Monitoring 49 Monitoring This chapter explains how to set up monitoring and use the Solo function on the 01V96i Monitor The 01V96i features the stereo signal path to feed the moni tors The monitoring signal source is patched to MONITOR OUT connectors L amp R and the PHONES connector The following diagram illustrates the monitoring signal flow STEREO L STEREO SOLOL SOLOR SOLO
282. plays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 17 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 These pages display the source Input channels and the corresponding Aux Sends in a matrix The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same 5111 5112 51 3 2114 DISPLAY 18 5 456 7 41811 12 15 14 15 15 IR Initial Dc n a rHi JU mem LEVEL dB UH 1 DISPLAY Use the following buttons to display the desired parame ters e eet Select the LEVEL button to display Send level bar graphs for Input Channels routed to Aux 1 8 Select the PRE POST button to dis play signal source points for Input Channels routed to Aux 1 8 2 FIX VARI These buttons indicate the Aux mode Fixed or Variable for Aux Out 1 8 and are only for display purposes 01 V96i Reference Manual 3 LEVEL This field displays in dB the level of the Aux Send cur rently selected by the cursor 2 Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL or PRE POST button then press ENTER to display the Level or Pre Post parameters 3 If you selected the PRE POST button in Step 2 move the cursor to the desired Input Chan nel and Aux intersection then press the ENTER button to change the signal source point 12354 5 6 8 M i Note You can swit
283. ponding LAYER button to select a Layer that contains the desired channels then press the channel SOLO buttons The channel SOLO button indicators and the SOLO SOLO indicator light up Only the soloed Input Chan nel signals are fed to the Monitor outputs Tip If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the DIO Setup Monitor page you can solo multiple Channels simultaneously 4 To solo and monitor Output Channels press the LAYER MASTER button then press the channel SOLO buttons Input and Output Channels Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 cannot be solo monitored simultaneously For example if you solo an Input Channel then solo an Output Channel the first solo channel is cancelled If you solo an Output Channel first then solo an Input Channel canceling the Input Channels solo will activate the Output Channels solo 5 You can unsolo all soloed channels by press ing all illuminated channel SOLO buttons The button indicators turn off You can also unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the SOLO CLEAR button 01 V96i Reference Manual 52 Surround Surround po This mode uses six channels that include front left front right rear left rear right front center and subwoofer This chapter describes surround panning which determines how Input Channel signals are panned within and across the stereo field Subwoofer Front L Center Front R Q About Surro
284. put two output reverb and chorus effects in series pore THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency High pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and chorused reverb bal REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all chorused reverb 100 all reverb 0 05 40 00H2 Modulation speed 1 FAP BIS 4 4 ded d REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel 000 THRU 4 LN 212 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and flange balance 0 Le all reverb 100 all flange FREQ 0 05 40 00Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for E normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back WAVE Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE MN to determine FREQ 1 FAP BIS De d de 3 01 V96i Reference Manual 5357 xipueddy 138 Appendix Parameter Lists REV gt FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in series 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time _______ time THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz uto 9 0 Hz 16 0 kHz He Reverb and flanged reverb bal REV BAL 0 10096 ance 0 all flanged reverb 1
285. put signal level at INPUTS 1 16 exceeds 34 dB The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping PEAK amp SIGNAL Indicators 2 IN connectors These unbalanced RCA phono connec tors accept line level signals from devices such as CD players When the AD 15 16 source selector is turned on pushed in signals input at 109 UNBAL these conductors are routed to AD Inputs 15 and 16 When the Monitor source selector is turned on pushed in you can monitor these signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors 01 V96i Reference Manual Digital Inputs amp Outputs 13 Output Section The 01V96i top and rear panels feature output connectors that enable you to connect a monitoring system effects pro cessors and other line level devices MONITOR OUT connectors L R These balanced TRS type phone con nectors output monitoring signals or input signals routed from the 2TR IN connectors The nominal output level is 4 dB Use the Monitor source selector in the Monitor Out amp Headphones section to select the signal output from these connectors MONITOR OUT 4dB BAL 0 0 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 These balanced OMNI 4dB BAL TRS type phone con nectors output any Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs The nomi nal output level is 4 dB Tip Any signal path can be patched to the OMNI OUT nectors See page 44 for more information
286. puts and Slot Outputs For example you can apply dithering to the 01V96i stereo mix data and record to a 16 bit digital recorder 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears The dithering settings are displayed at the bottom of the page DLO SETUP Initial Data miSrii 85112 5113 5114 Qo HIGHER SANFLE RATE DATA TRANSFER FORMAT Lour 5275 eee OJT DIGITAL 2 Move cursor to the output channel to which you want to apply dithering then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the value that matches the resolution of the receiving device Note Youcannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are set to OFF e Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of the 01V96i Tip To copy the currently selected setting to all channels double click the ENTER button The copy confirmation window is displayed 01V96i Reference Manual 8 bojeuy 16 Analog amp Digital 1 Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates To operate the 01V96i at higher sampling frequencies 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz and transfer digital audio signals to and from connected external devices you must set the data trans fer format in accordance wit
287. quired for the level to change by 6 dB 160 points q ge y I O Characteristics Time Series Analysis Input Signal Output Signal E HOLD 5 THRESHOLD 5 8 ATTACK DECAY 5 5 ae res a 8 gt J THRESHOLD COA RANGE 27 Nus Input Level Time Time 01 V96i Reference Manual Dynamics Parameters 153 COMP Section COMP The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter which with a RATIO of 0 1 reduces the level to the threshold This means that the limiters output level never actually exceeds the threshold THRESHOLD dB 54 0 to 0 0 541 points 42 of input signal required to 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 T 7 1 2 01 2521 23 071 This determines the amount of compression that 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 is the change in output signal level relative to 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 00 1 change in input signal level 16 points This determines how soon the signal will be com pressed once compressor has been triggered 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec This determines how soon the compressor returns 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec to its normal gain once the trigger signal level RELEASE ms 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec drops below the threshold The value is expressed 96kHz 3 ms 21 1 sec as the duration required for the level to change by 160 points
288. r as copy sources 3 Usethe cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the copy source parameter then press the ENTER button Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Paste DST page appears EXTRA ST11 STI2 STIS 5114 z Cy C9 9 GLOBAL PASTE DESTINATION SCENE m m r7 r7 gm gm gm gm Ld ESTRA 4 ENDING UN 01 V96i Reference Manual 91925 74 Libraries Libraries This chapter describes 01V96i s various libraries About the Libraries The 01 96 features seven libraries that enable you to store Channel Input Patch Output Patch Effects and other data You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to restore previous parameter values The 01V96i offers the following libraries Channel Library Input Patch Library Output Patch Library Effects Library Gate Library Compressor Library EQ Library Tip You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager software Be sure to back up your important data You can also store library data to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data filer by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 107 General Library Operation Most library functions are the same for each library 1 Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the desired library pages The procedure for loca
289. rameters for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 Setting the Levels Move the STEREO fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels Press the ON button in the STEREO section to turn the Ste reo Out on or off To set Bus Out 1 8 levels press the MASTER button in the LAYER section to select the Master layer then move faders 9 16 At this time you can turn Bus Out 1 8 on or off using the ON 9 16 buttons and Balancing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 1 Press the SEL button of the bus to which you want to apply EQ or set the level balance 2 adjust the EQ of currently selected bus select the desired band by pressing one of the following buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section HIGH button HIGH band H MID button HIGH MID band L MID button LOW MID band LOW button LOW band 3 Use the O FREQUENCY and GAIN con trols to adjust the Q frequency and gain of the band selected in Step 2 See page 21 for more information on EQ 4 To adjust the Stereo Out Balance parameter use the PAN control in the SELECTED CHAN NEL section Note If you select Aux Out 1 8 or Bus Out 1 8 the PAN control is disabled Pairing Buses or Aux Sends You can pair adjacent odd even in this order buses or Aux Sends for stereo operation Paired bus and Aux Send linked parameters and non linked parameters that are available for independent controls are listed below
290. request format compress The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number that is being requested If this is 256 the data of the Edit Buffer will be bulk dumped If this is 8192 the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk dumped STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01101101 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm 11110111 FO 43 2n 4 40 20 20 38 43 39 33 6D mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 4 m 0 99 256 8192 5 0 99 EDIT BUFFER UNDO End of exclusive 2 8 2 3 Setup memory bulk dump format Of the setup memory of the 01V96i this bulk dumps data other than the User Define MIDI Remote User Defined Keys User Assignable Layer Control Change Table and Program Change Table STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010011 00000010 00000000 Ottttttt Obbbbbbb 11110111 FO 43 On cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 53 02 00 ds de ee F7 Sys
291. ring and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 74 Since ST IN Channels do not feature compressors if you select an ST IN Channel the message Stereo in has no Comp appears on the dis play 01 V96i Reference Manual 80 Libraries The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library No Description a gars lS Expander template Hard kneed compressor template COMPAND S Soft kneed compressor template Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum Hard kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum 7 Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum 8 ___ Expander for we with acoustic snare drum 10 Dr Tom EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic tom toms which automatically reduces the volume when the tom toms are not played improving mic separation Soft kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and ambience of cymbals recorded 11 A Dr OverTop 5 with overhead mics It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played improving mic separation E B Finger COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a finger picked electric bass guitar E B Slap COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a slapped electric bass guitar COMP Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a synth bass 15 COMP Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano COMP A variation
292. rs enabling you to enter a name TITLE EDIT cam PRESS STORE 3 Edit the move the cursor to the but ton then press ENTER The new name is now effective Tip The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library 01V96i Reference Manual Bus Outs 29 Bus Outs This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96i s Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 parameters About Stereo Out The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out 1 8 signals mixes them into two channels processes them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the STEREO OUT and 2TR OUT connectors The following dia gram illustrates the Stereo Out signal flow Gain Reduction Meter METER METER RES a 1 EE ga METER 10dBV OUT ON LEVEL BAL li o 1 OUTPUT 4 1 Same as stereo master L eremo R VV OUTPUT PATCH STEREO OUT INSERT This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to external devices via the on board connectors or I O card or insert internal effects processors ATT Attenuator This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals to be input to the EQ The attenuator prevents post EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels that are too low
293. rt data 16 chan nels x 1 ports The MIDI THRU port outputs MIDI messages received at the MIDIIN port without modifica tion as is USB port This port is used to connect a computer and transfer MIDI messages This is a multiport interface that trans mits and receives up to eight port data 16 channels x 8 ports In order to connect the 01V96i via USB to a com puter the appropriate driver software must be installed in the computer You can download this software from the Yamaha Pro Audio website http www yamahaproaudio com For more information about installation and setup refer to the above website and to the installation guide included with the program you downloaded Note If the computer is turned on but the USB MIDI appli cation has not been launched 01V96i performance may be slow In this case cancel the assignment of the USB port as the MIDI message transmission port SLOT If an optional MY16 mLAN I O card is installed in the slot MIDI data transfer to and from an external MIDI device is available via the MY16 mLAN card 01 V96i Reference Manual MIDI Port Setup Selecting a Port for MIDI Message Transfer To configure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears This page enables you to set MIDI message input and output A initial Data geL 511358114 Gee SETUP PORT Tx
294. s on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the MIX FB GAIN parameters see page 18 Tip You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the INSERT DELAY button once then press the SEL button to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1 8 Compressing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 compressors press the DYNAMICS button then the F3 button to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page and use the SEL buttons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1 8 Initial Data gi 5112 5113 5114 ERI D HRH 5 BUS 1 BUS1 8051 EDIT G THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK S BdB 2 5 1 D ms RELEASE OUT GAIN 22 Ome The parameters on this page and procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 20 01V96i Reference Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from Display 31 the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 EQ press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F1 but ton to display the EQ EQ Edit page and use the SEL but tons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1 8 Initial Dota Fe STIS 5114 EDIT EXE LIBRARY IH ATT _ OUT ATT The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are
295. s output from the right channel 3 After mixing the stereo input the sound processed by Phaser A and then additionally processed by Phaser B is output from both the left and right channels 4 The left input channel is pro cessed by Phaser A and output from the left channel and the right input channel is processed by Phaser B and output from the right channel 01V96i Reference Manual 51511 xipuaddy 146 Appendix Parameter Lists Effects and tempo synchronization Some of the 01 V96i s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo There are two such types of effect delay type effects and modulation type effects For delay type effects the delay time will change according to the tempo For modulation type effects the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo syn chronization 1 SYNC 2 3 4 DELAY 5 FREQ This is the on off switch for tempo synchronization NOTE and TEMPO These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization DELAY and FREQ DELAY is the delay time and FREQ is the frequency of the modulation signal These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change DELAY is rele vant only for delay type effects and FREQ is relevant only for modulation type effects How the
296. s you to control external DAW Digital Audio Workstation equipment MIDI devices etc There are two types of Remote functions Remote and Machine Control REMOTE Remote Layer To use these types of Remote functions you must connect the 01V96i to a target device via USB or an optional MY16 mLAN card installed in the slot and operate the faders and ON buttons on the top panel to control the external device remotely You can specify a target device and parameter values on the DIO Setup Remote page This layer is enabled when you turn on the LAYER REMOTE button During Remote ation the controls on the top panel enable you to control the external device You cannot adjust the 01V96i s parameters unless you select a different layer You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on the top panel of the 01V96i by using Remote layer The fol lowing targets are available for remote control ProTools You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools Nuendo You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo Cubase You can remotely control Steinberg Cubase General DAW You can remotely control DAW software that supports the protocol used by Pro Tools e User Defined You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders or ON buttons to remotely control a connected MIDI device such as a synthesizer User Assignable Layer You can combine the 01V96i channels to create a custom la
297. sampling rates Naming 24 35 Vintage Phaser 144 Pee 2 MUS 16 2 2 SINGIDE Senes ttes e cde 16 Setting from the control surface W SRC SECHONS suut 14 33 window Scene In Fade 71 Setting from the display 30 Changing the surround mode 53 Scene Out Fade page 71 setting the levels NOU Channel Pairing 27 Scene Rcl Safe page 72 Viewing the settings 31 Copy operation 42 Scene Scene page 69 STEREO OUT connectors 10 13 WORD CLOCK IN connector 10 Scene Sort Page 72 STEREO section 8 WORD CLOCK OUT connector 10 SCENE button titer 8 5 9 Scene MEM Auto Update preference Store Confirmation preference 109 ADM LR D AE rx 109 Storing and Recalling 69 Sane menor un mer eme cessante 52 Auto update function 70 taucht roit on 54 68 DIV Soon mM 56 Fading C UO 71 F S 34 button 69 F R
298. signal TRG LVL 60 to 0 dB level required to trigger record ing or playback Once playback has been trig gered subsequent triggers are Coen ms ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time PLAY button is pressed In CONT mode playback continues once the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter In INPUT START a o Playback start point in millisec onds Playback end point in millisec In MANUAL mode recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons In INPUT mode REC MODE MANUAL INPUT _ Record Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button and actual recording is triggered by the input signal recording starts before the trig In MOMENT mode the sample the PLAY button has been mode playback is triggered by onds LOOP Loop start point in milliseconds start point in Loop start point in milliseconds 0 100 Number of times the sample NUM plays START Tm SAMPLE EN Playback start point in samples END mem SAMPLE Playback end point in samples LOOP A SAMPLE Loop start point in samples PITCH fee Playback pitch shift semitones FINE 50 to 50 cents Playback pitch shift fine PLAY button can be triggered by MIDI TRG OFF C1 C6 ALL using MIDI Note on off mes sages 0 0 2970 5 ms fs 44 1 kHz 0 0 2729 2 ms fs 48 kHz 0 0 2970 5 ms fs 88 2 kHz 0 0 2729 2 ms fs 96 kHz 2 0 131000 fs 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 0 262000 fs 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 01 V96i
299. spectively 01V96i Reference Manual bunjur 9 sjauueyD 60 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters Out Mute page 5 To turn a group on or off move the corre This page enables you to set Mute groups U X for Bus sponding button in the ENABLE column then Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out press ENTER When the group Enable button is turned off the corre In Mute page sponding group is temporarily cancelled PA IRZ GRUP Initial 2111 STIZ STIS 27114 OO 9 9 9 6 EIUHEUT MUTE MASTER To use a fader group operate one of the fad 12 2 4 a oe UTE ers or level controls for the grouped channels Note Ifyou wish to change the relative level balance between the grouped channels while this page is displayed first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels for which you 4115114115155 4 E H D P x 718 1320 2128 25048 26262725 29583152 4 ENABLE e im want to change the level from the group Ifother pages are displayed press and hold down the SEL button for the desired channels to temporarily remove them from the group then change the level balance SSS Em m
300. splay then press and hold down the AUX 6 button and press ENTER You can reset the pan settings only when the AUX 7 but ton indicator is lit steadily 01V96i Reference Manual 90 Remote Control Soloing Channels To solo Pro Tools channels press the SOLO buttons of the desired channels Grouped channels are soloed together and other channels are muted Press the SOLO buttons again to unsolo the channels Configuring Sends A E as Pre or Post You can set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends A E to pre or post 1 Press the F3 button to select Channel Dis play mode 2 Press the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 5 but tons to select the desired Sends 3 To toggle between pre and post move the cursor to the parameter control on the dis play then press ENTER Pressing ENTER repeatedly toggles between pre and post Setting Send Levels You can adjust Pro Tools Send send levels as follows 1 Press the F3 button to select Channel Dis play mode 2 Press the AUX SELECT AUX 1 AUX 5 but tons to select the desired Sends 3 Move the cursor to the parameter control of the channel for which you want to adjust the Send level then rotate the Parameter wheel You can set Send levels by operating the faders if faders ON buttons and the PAN control are in Flip mode Refer to Flip Mode for more information Muting Sends
301. sss 1 Contents of the Owner s Manual Booklet 3 ITee ei 4 Control Surface amp Rear Panel 6 dt 6 Rear Donel DoD 10 Analog 1 0 amp Digital I O 12 Analog Inputs eco menage 12 Digital Inputs amp Outputs 13 Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I O Card 14 Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status 222222 02229 14 Dithering Digital Outputs ep rn 15 Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates 16 input Channels ois 17 About Input Channels tae tales 17 Setting the Input Channels from the Display 18 Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface 25 Patrino Input iore eror adt Id eb 26 Naming Input Channels ehm bp 28 BUS OUTS 29 About Stereo itu ae ti HUNE 29 BUSOU MM p 29 Setting Stereo Out and Bus 1 8 from Display 30 Setting Stereo Out and Bus 1 8 from Control eee ree ne ere RN 33 Pairing Buses or Aux Sends iai 33 Attenuating Output Signals eret ree erectus
302. ster unit to the MIDI OUT port on the slave unit using a MIDI cable Connect the MIDI OUT port on the master unit to the MIDI IN port on the slave unit using MIDI cable MIDI IN OUT connector or 2 Pes 331 sonas LEN the EST 0199 O 32 iy i3 01V96i Slave 01V96i Master 3 On the slave unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Patch page appears 4 Assignthe Bus signalsto the channels that are used for the cascade connection The following signals are available CAS BUS1 BUS8 Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs CASAUXI AUX8 AUX1 AUX8 Aux Bus 1 8 Aux Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs Outs amp Outs Solo Bus L amp R Cascade
303. t 1 BBR ADE M4 d d 4 FREQ 005 4000 Hz Modulation speed 100 He 8 00 peaking type frequency 10910 FO peaking type bandwith Used in conjunction with TEMPO 1 NOTE E to determine FREQ FAP B UIS diid ja d ded 3 L gt R FBG 99 to 99 R gt L FBG 99 to 99 SYMPHONIC Two input two output symphonic effect 005400082 Modulation speed Modulation waveform High pass filter cutoff frequency 01V96i Reference Manual Effects Parameters 135 PHASER Two input two output 16 stage phaser FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset PHASE 0 00 354 38 Left and right modulation phase degrees balance STAGE 2 2 Number of phase shift stages 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ FP FB 4142 4 d AUTO PAN Two input two output autopanner FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency 100 Hz 8 00 KHz FQ peaking type frequency eaa 100 010 EQ peaking type bandwidth poc 1 L lt gt R L gt R L lt
304. t in an incor rect cascade connection 7 On the master unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Cascade page appears then adjust the Attenuators using the parameter controls The DIO Setup Cascade page enables you to adjust the level of signals input to the Cascade Bus using the dedi cated attenuators You can also turn the Cascade Buses on or off using the buttons below the parameter controls SETUP Initial ITE BL 112 2113 ST 4 CHi CH1 OO Bk CASCADE ATTENUAT LOM Buzz BUS4d BUSS BUSSE Q Bde 12 OFF prr AUS AUS AUS AU 9 8dB OB orr irr mmm CASCADE PATCH FAOLITEPLIT 8 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly to display the DIO Setup MIDI Host page then set the Cascade Link parameter to MIDI eee REMOTE Uu R LRVER CASCADE LINK Ugg DRH ee Repeat Step 8 for master unit After Steps 8 and 9 the slave unit will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages 10 match the parameters of both 01 9 locate the DIO Setup MIDI Host page on the copy source unit Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter then press ENTER
305. t was stored 4832 1 48 4832 1 24 1 16 ddd 1 12 3 32 1 8 ddd 1 6 3 16 1 1 4 4 3 8 4 3 4 1 1 2 1 01V96i Reference Manual Preset EQ Parameters 147 Preset EQ Parameters __ PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 5 Bass Drum F 100 2 265 1 06 kHz 5 30 KHz 12 5 kHz 85 Hz 950 Hz 4 00 kHz PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 5 dB 125 Hz 180 Hz 1 12 kHz L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 6 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 95 Hz 950 Hz 3 15 kHz Syn Bass 1 G 12 Syn Bass 2 G 0 0 dB 12 5 kHz 4 0 dB 7 50 kHz 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 E som 40042 zsok 12518 NEC PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING umi 13202 315 tz 5 00 kz wee Snare G 1 5 48 8 5 2 5 dB 4 0 88 180m 335 236 Kriz 400 e ee 2 0 88 7 5 dB 2 04 1 04 Te 630 kre 14 12 20dB 0 088 3 0 88 e 425 He 1 06 132 p s 4 ESHE PEAKING FEARING SHELF 425 gt 7 50
306. tatus when the channels were added to the group 01 V96i Reference Manual Using Fader Group Master 61 Using Fader Group Master The 01V96i features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of all channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative balance between channels much like group on an analog mixing console While this function is enabled channel fader operation does not affect channel levels in the corresponding Fader group 1 d After you perform Step 5 in Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups on page 59 use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT FADER MASTER check box or the OUTPUT FADER MASTER check box then press ENTER to turn on the Fader Group Master function IHPLIT FADER MASTER 1 MASTER de When the Fader Master check box is checked you can set channel levels of the Fader groups in the Master column When the Master column is selected repeatedly pressing the ENTER button turns the Fader group on and off You can also make these settings in the In Master page or Out Master page as shown below Press the DISPLAY ACCESS GROUP button repeatedly until the Group In Master or Group Out Master page appears 501 502 113 2114 Bk GQ 9 2 FADER MASTER ALL WOM HAL 4 Use the cursor buttons to select parameters then use the Parameter
307. te type GATE or DUCK ING Note You cannot change the gate type on this page To change the gate type recall a program that uses the desired gate type from the Gate library 5 Meters These meters indicate the levels of the post gate signals and the amount of gain reduction 6 ON OFF The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channels gate on or off 7 PARAMETER These controls enable you to set the gate parameters See page 148 for more information on the parameters Tip This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels You store the gate settings in the Gate library which features preset programs that can be used for various applications see page 79 01 V96i Reference Manual sjouueu andu 20 Input Channels Compressing Input Channels To set the Input Channel compressors use the SEL buttons to select the desired Input Channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F3 button to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page ICS Initial Data 2112 571 35 OQ C Up CHI CHIMP EDIT CH1 POSITION G THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK il 2 5n RELEASE OUT GAIN 9 229 B HdB 2 GATE ELIT j 1 POSITION Use the Parameter wheel or the INC DEC buttons to select the position of the compressor within the channel from the following options
308. tedly press the button you pressed in Step 2 to display the Aux Pan page Ini tli al Data mierisrisrs3sra4 9 00 0 INFUT LINK EL 14 1L 1R EU CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER ESE AIRS CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER LETER H 1 Aux pan controls These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed from Input Channels to paired Aux buses 2 MODE The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned 3 INPUT PAN LINK When this parameter is turned on Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Pan 4 Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the desired Input Channel the rotate the Param eter wheel to set the pan value 5 If necessary move the cursor to the MODE parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel to select INDIVIDUAL GANG or INV GANG then press ENTER If the INPUT PAN LINK ON OFF button is turned off this Mode setting is independent of the Mode parameter on the Pan page See page 22 for more information on Mode options 01V96i Reference Manual 42 Aux Outs 6 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the Aux Send Pan setting move the cursor to the INPUT PAN LINK ON OFF button then press ENTER The pan positions on the Pan page are copied to the Aux pan setting and the pan controls on both pages are linked Tip If paire
309. tem exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl No 256 Current total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Setup data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 4 Setup memory bulk dump request format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 FO 43 2 7 4 40 20 20 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 4 DATA NAME 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010011 00000010 00000000 11110111 38 43 39 33 53 02 00 F7 No 256 Current End of exclusive 2 8 2 5 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will in some cases change if the same bank is being used STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01001100 00000000 Obbbbbbb Ottttttt Obbbbbbb 11110111 FO 4
310. teps below to change the signal path patched to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch 2TR Out page appears Initial ata 501 502 113 2114 ak 0 G 92 BUT DIGITAL PATCH OUT Dia L STEREO ZTA OUT DIGITAL INSAADIRECT OUT E I Signals assigned on the Out Patch page can also be assigned on this page 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change 01 V96i Reference Manual 3ndul 46 Input amp Output Patching Patching Direct Outs Input Channel 1 32 signals can be directly patched to any outputs or slot outputs as well as Bus Out 1 8 and Stereo Out This patching is convenient when you want to record the input signal of each Input Channel to an individual track on a connected DAW 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Direct Out page appears Ini tial Data IF STI1 5712 STIS STIA EDIT ER EE GJ GI DIRECT OUT DESTINATION OUT PRE PRE FADER 75885195 UT UT IMSEADIBECT TRE OUT OUT E The parameters on this page are described below 1 1 32 These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination outputs ADAT
311. ter change ECHO is ON this message will be retransmitted without MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010001 11 Function call Pair 0000 OF function Osssssss sh Source channel Osssssss sl SourcechannelL DATA Oddddddd dh Destination channel H Oddddddd 1 Destination channel L EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function channel PAIR ON with COPY 0x00 1 ON with RESET BOTH 0x01 1 PAIR OFF 0x02 1 1 0 CH1 31 CH32 128 BUS1 135 BUS8 256 AUX1 263 AUX8 512 STEREO Effect is O Effect 1 3 Effect 4 In the case of PAIR you must specify channels for which pairing is pos sible n the case of PAIR ON with COPY you must specify Source Channel as the copy source and Destination Channel as the copy destination 2 8 3 19 Parameter change Function call Event Effect Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 11 0 15 Device Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 2f link Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA Oiiiiiii ih inpatch 01111111 11 oh outpatch ol 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number SCENE LIB LINK 0x20 0 99 0 response only 2 8
312. the Direct Out then press ENTER The Direct Out patching is now effective and the signals are routed to the assigned outputs ADAT OUT channels or slot output channels 01 V96i Reference Manual Insert Patching 47 Insert Patching The 01V96i s Input Channels and Output Channels Stereo Out Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 feature independent Insert Ins and Outs Inputs outputs ADAT connector channels slot channels and internal effects processor inputs and outputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and Outs In this way you can send the signals to external effects proces sors for processing or insert internal effects Individual Insert Patching You can patch the 01V96i s inputs outputs connector channels slot channels and effects processor inputs and out puts to the Insert Ins and Outs The same procedure applies to both Input Channels and Output Channels Effects Input Output Input connector Output connector Insert Out Insert In Channel 1 Press the SEL button of an Input Channel Output Channel for Insert patching 2 Press the INSERT DELAY button repeat edly until the INS DLY Insert page appears Initial Dita 2111 5712 5 5 14 CH1 CH EDIT EE GU G G G pi Ria POST FADER FADER I HSEET This page contains the following parameters 1 POSITION This parameter determines the insert position of the Insert p
313. the ID of the devices you wish to control 5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Machine page appears Stile 5113 2114 Initial lata EDIT E ER AFTUR AFTUR AFTUR AFTUR AFTUR p mi pr m TIHE CODE 00 00 00 00 2 MACH INE This page contains the following parameters 1 LOCATE TIME section This section enables you to set the locate points e LOCATE 1 8 These buttons locate the positions specified by the TIME values on external machines CORDE ones This Return To Zero button locates the zero timecode position on exter nal machines Locate points are specified in hour minute second frame format These buttons capture the current position on external machines and import the information into the TIME column 2 TRACK ARMING section This section controls the tracks on external machines 1 24 buttons These buttons turn external tracks 1 24 or off and set or cancel their Record Ready mode ALL CLEAR Turning on this button switches all buttons 1 24 simultaneously 01 V96i Reference Manual Machine Control Function 99 3 TRANSPORT section This section enables you to control the transport func
314. this check box is checked a Scene is recalled using the currently specified Fade Time The Fade Time set ting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored This check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade page 2 ALL INPUT CLEAR This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to 00 0 second 3 INPUT CH1 32 ST IN 1 4 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Input Channel in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 sec onds The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair works in unison with its partner Tip If you operate a fader while fading channels the faders Fade Time setting is temporarily ignored You copy currently selected Input Channel Fade Time to all Input Channels by double clicking the ENTER button to display a window for copying This is convenient when you wish to set the Fade Time for all channels simultaneously Fading Output Channels To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels Stereo Out Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Out Fade page appears The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page SCENE Initial Data 85711 5112 5713 5714 CH4 CH4 EDIT prm LITPLIT FADE TIME Global Fade Time gt i 4 5 B 7 8 0 POE BB BB B i BB B8 Ba 0 2 sec 00 0 BUS sec
315. ting a Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assignable Layer If you set the Remote Layer target to USER ASSIGNABLE you can create a custom layer by combining any 01V96i chan nels excluding the Stereo Out This custom layer is called User Assignable layer 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP but ton repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears 2 Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGN ABLE then press ENTER A confirmation window appears 3 Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The 01V96i displays the page shown below SETUP Initial Data 8 5713 2114 mmi Es 0 0 USER ASSIGNAELE LAYER 19 11 13 14 15 16 MIDI HOST A MONITOR A MACHINE 4 Select the channels you wish to assign to the User Assignable layer using the 1 16 param eter boxes 1 You can store up to four 16 channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1 4 via the BANK 1 4 buttons If you press ENTER before selecting the channels to assign you will still be able to select the channels you wish to assign in the User CH Select window Tip You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and pressing ENTER 5 Use the LAYER REMOTE button to assign or recall the User Assignable layer You can use the faders and ON buttons to control the assigned channels 01V96i Reference Manual Cascad
316. ting library pages varies depend ing on the library Refer to the latter part of this chapter for more information on how to display the desired library page The example below assumes you have located the Input Patch library page PATCH Initial Data CH1 CHi 7 PATCH LIBRARY Ha LIBRARY TITLE ata ata Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Ll ee Bal gs da m n Js 4 dx 2 la The library memory title list is displayed in the middle of the page The message No Data appears in the title col umn of empty library memories 9 icon is displayed next to the name of read only preset memories You cannot store clear or edit the titles of these memories Memories 0 and U are special read only memories Recall memory 0 to reset the parameter settings to their initial values Recall 0 to undo memory recall and store operations 2 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desired memory The selected memory appears inside the dotted box 3 Move the cursor to one of the following func tion buttons then press ENTER 1 TITLE EDIT This button displays the Title Edit window which enables you to edit the title of the selected memory Move the cur sor to the OK button then press ENTER to confirm the edited title Refer to Title Edit Window the Owner s Manual
317. tons speaker icons appear indicating a typical listening posi tion and the Surround Channel to Bus Out configuration e 3 1 Surround e 5 1 Surround 3 Press the ENTER button The confirmation window for changing the Surround mode appears CONF I OH Chanae Surround Mode WES 4 Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The 01V96i enters the selected Surround mode 5 Tolink the Input Channel Pan setting with the stereo surround panning move the cursor to the PAN SURR LINK button then press ENTER When the PAN SURR LINK button is turned on adjust ing the Input Channel pan settings will also change the stereo surround panning accordingly and vice versa 6 To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment move the cursor to the SURR BUS SETUP button then press ENTER 01V96i Reference Manual punong 54 Surround The DIO Setup Surr Bus page appears SURROUND BUS SETUP SURROUND BUS SETUP BUS1 BUSS BUSS BUS4 BUSS BUSSE BUS E Surround LA to Steren 1O SETUP Initial Dota 5 11 STI 5713 5714 mmo SURROUND HODE 1 BUS1 BUS8 These parameters select channels to be assigned to the Bus Outs in 3 1 5 1 and 6 1 Surround modes 2 INIT These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting Surround Pan Recording 3 Surround LR to Stereo When this check
318. tor 2 Aux Out 3 OMNI Out connector 3 Aux Out 4 OMNI Out connector 4 Aux Out 5 OMNI Out connector 1 Aux Out 6 OMNI Out connector 2 Aux Out 7 OMNI Out connector 3 Aux Out 8 OMNI Out connector 4 By default the following signal paths are patched to outputs ADAT OUT output channels and slot output channels Tip You can patch a signal to multiple outputs You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library Refer to Libraries on page 74 for more information You can change these patches if you desire The procedure for patching signals to output varies depending on the output connectors and slots Changing the Signal Path to the ADAT OUT Connector Slot or OMNI OUT connectors Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to the ADAT OUT connector the optional mini YGDAI card installed in the slot or the OMNI OUT connectors 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Patch page appears Each parameter box displays the currently patched signal path Initial Data mieriisri2 STI3 2114 EDIT IN LIE OLT Use BUT f I 1 SLOT 1 16 These parameter boxes set routing of Slot Channel 1 16 signals 2 ADAT 1 8 These parameter boxes set the routing of ADAT OUT connector output channel 1 8 signals 3 OMNI 1 4 These parameter boxes set the routing of OMNI OUT connector 1 4 signals T
319. trol Surface 25 Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface You can use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control most parameters for Input Chan nels Setting Input Channel Levels and Panning the Channels Input Channels 1 32 1 Press the LAYER 1 16 or 17 32 button to select a layer 2 Press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust the input level and or pan settings 3 Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels 4 Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN con trol to adjust the pan settings When you rotate the PAN control the Pan Route Pan page is displayed automatically ROUTE 00 ds Initial Data m rsr2srssra4 CEI CHI CH1 29 ENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER 19 11 12 15 14 15 15 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER 17 18 19 1 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER B ST IN Channels 1 1 Use the ST IN ST IN button to select the desired ST IN Channels The indicators next to the ST IN button display the ST IN Channels currently selected for control by the ST IN section 2 Press the SEL button for the channel for which you want to adjust the level and or settings
320. tted on the Tx CH if Control Change Tx is ON using the four mes sages NRPN control number 62h 63h and Data Entry control number 06h 26h Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match Parameter Change messages will always be used 01V96i Reference Manual IAIN xipueddy 174 Appendix MIDI If TABLE is selected STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn Control change Onnnnnnn nn Control number 0 95 102 119 Ovvvvvvv vw Control Value 0 127 If NRPN is selected STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 01100010 62 NRPNLSB Ovvvvvvw vv LSB of parameter number STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change 1 DATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB Ovvvvvvv vv of parameter number STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Controlchange 1 DATA 00000110 06 MSBof data entry Ovvvvvvv MSB of parameter data STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change 1 DATA 00100110 26 LSB of data entry Ovvvvvvw LSB of parameter data 1 The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during transmission Reception must be implemented so that reception oc curs whether or not STATUS is present 2 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Reception If Program Change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT If Program Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches these messages will be received However if OMNI is ON they
321. ttenuate or amplify the level of signals that will be input to the EQ The attenuator enables you to prevent post EQ signals from clipping and to correct signal levels that are too low 4 BAND 4 band equalizer This parametric EQ features four bands high high mid low mid and low e INPUT DELAY Input delay This section enables you to delay input signals You can use this delay to fine tune the timing between channels or as a delay effect with feedback ON On Off This section enables you to turn the channel on or off The channel is muted with the Off setting e LEVEL This section enables you to adjust the input level of the Input Channel signal e PAN This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus chan nels AUX Aux Send level This section enables you to adjust the level of signals routed to Aux Sends 1 8 The signals can be routed to Aux Sends from either the pre fader or post fader posi tion e INSERT This section enables you to patch input signals to external devices via the on board I O connectors or I O card or insert the internal effect processors You can patch any inputs outputs or I O card channels Note that this is different from the INSERT I O connectors in the AD Input section e METER This section enables you to switch the metering position of
322. tween FROM and TO inclusive become the paste destination You can paste up to 10 Any channel or parameter settings for the current scene can scenes at a time be copied and pasted into one or more scenes This function is useful when you want to apply edited parameter settings in 6 Use the cursor buttons to select the PASTE the current scene to other scenes button then use the ENTER button to paste the settings 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Paste SRC page appears You cannot paste the settings to write protected scenes To restore the previous settings that existed before the paste operation click the UNDO button then press ENTER button However if the settings in the scene are changed after the paste operation such as by saving clearing or sorting the scene or receiving scene data via UP MASTER MIDI Bulk Dump the UNDO function is disabled Also note that you will not be able to undo the operation after you turn off the power to console OTHERS BS E 2 31 9 5 6 7 5 _ y 1 s s STEREO ROUT 1 STEREO SORT E 2 Use the cursor buttons SEL buttons or Parameter wheel to select the channel cate gory then use the ENTER button or the INC DEC buttons to select the copy source channel The number of the source channel is highlighted You can also select Group Masters internal Effects and a User Defined Remote laye
323. uch etc to one of the User Defined buttons you can control the Automa tion settings for each channel by using that User Defined but ton For more information on assigning functions to the user defined keys refer to Using the User Defined Keys in the Owners Manual separate booklet Press the STEREO OUT channel SEL button The button indicator lights up and the Channel 1 16 SEL buttons become available for the Automation mode setting Press the desired channel SEL buttons while pressing the programmed User Defined button to switch the correspond ing channels Automation settings While the channel SEL buttons are available for the Auto mation mode setting pressing the SEL buttons will cause the Fader Touch or Untouch command to be transmitted to Pro Tools This is useful for Automation punch in and out recording Note Operating a fader also causes the Fader Touch command to be transmitted Also whenever the transport mode changes such as Play and Stop the Fader Untouch command is trans mitted Depending on the currently selected Automation mode the channel SEL button indicators operate as follows Pro Tools Automation Mode DAW AUTO WRITE T DAW AUTO TOUTCH Record Ready SEL Button Indicators User Defined Keys Function DAW AUTO LATCH Red Recording DAW AUTO READ Auto read steadily Nuendo Cubase Remote Layer You can remotely control Nuendo and Cubas
324. ue of the DSP The inter pretation of the data will depend on the parameter 2 8 3 24 Parameter request Remote Meter Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received data of the specified address is transmitted on the Rx change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message 10 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O0011nnnn n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00011010 1 OlV96i ADDRESS 00100001 21 Remote meter Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL ch Count H cl CountL EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 25 Parameter change Remote Time Counter When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds When you want to transmit Counter information continuously a Request must be trans mitted within every 10 seconds Reception This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request the Time Counter infor mation is transmitted on RxCH channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again or if the PORT setting is changed I
325. und Pan The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a two dimensional field using a multi channel playback sys tem and pans the image to the front rear left and right in relation to the listening position To pan the stereo image you can use the Parameter wheel or INC DEC buttons If each channels follow pan see page 24 is turned off you can route the signals to the corresponding Bus Outs regard less ofthe Surround Pan setting This is convenient when you 61 wish to assign the surround source or surround effect returns This mode uses seven channels that include six channels to the Buses of 5 1 mode plus rear center If Nominal Pan see page 109 in the page is checked the level of the Input Channels that are panned hard left or right will be used as the nominal level If the check box is not checked the nominal level will be 3 dB You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene In addition to a normal Stereo mode 01V96i features the fol lowing three Surround modes e 3 1 This mode uses four channels that include front left front right front center and rear Front L Center Front R Rear center When you select one of these Surround modes each surround channel signal is output as the Bus Out signal specified on the DIO Setup Surr Bus page see page 54 The following table shows the factory default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in each Surround mode
326. une the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameters 140 4 48 R44 4844 20 F 32 128 4 56 132 F 24 01V96i Reference Manual PUNOLNS 58 Surround 7 list multiple channel surround set tings press the PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Surr1 16 Surr17 32 Surr ST IN page appears These pages display and enable you to edit the surround pan settings for 16 channels OUT Initial Data gL 511251155714 CHI uro ui Hg me C EHI em marssmusum D aquusmsamesam o auxsmsassase 2o qunsususasum DOO Qoo anemseesse DOO pusmnanunnn O pununanunnn O pununnunann punumnnnnn Mannunnanaat 50 5 1 Y 5 1 C Manunnnnnn quuanssssusm 4 l uasastmasnsi 20 Mannunnanaat massuusaue So Qo pennnnmsnnn O pusmnnnunnn O 8 See
327. ut Channel parameters you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel to directly change the setting This section explains how to set the parameters via the dis play Switching the Signal Phase To switch the phase of each Input Channel press the INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the following INS DLY Phase page appears Move the cursor to the NOR REV button of the channel for which you want to change the phase then press the ENTER or INC DEC buttons to change the setting SF INS DLYI 9 Initial 85111 5 STI3 5114 CH1 CH EE HPLIT 19 18 26 STEREO INPUT 1L 1E zL zHR 3L 3A 1 NOR REV These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel phase NOR buttons indicate normal phase and REV buttons indicate reversed phase 2 GLOBAL The GLOBAL NOR REV buttons allow you to set the phase for all Input Channels simultaneously Tip The name currently selected channel is indicated in the upper right corner of the screen You can set the phase separately for each of the ST IN Channels or for each channel in a channel pair If you selected the desired STIN Channel using the corresponding SEL button pressing the same SEL button repeatedly will toggle between channels LandR Delaying Input Channels To set the delay for each
328. utton LAYER Section CD 1 1 6 1 7 32 buttons LAYER 2 MASTER button 5 3 REMOTE button I Tip The ST IN section is not affected by the layer settings 01 V96i Reference Manual Display Section YAMAHA amp i ER 0 30 s o 20 5 0 o s s REO 1 Display 2 Stereo meters 3 Contrast control 4 F1 F4 buttons 5 Left Tab Scroll lt 4 button 6 Right Tab Scroll button 4UTE1 32 MUTESS 45 OUT FADER fa OUT MUTE Tab Scroll arrow SELECTED CHANNEL Section QD PAN control SELECTED CHANNEL 2 HIGH button D PAN 3 HIGH MID button EQUALIZER 4 LOW MID button 6 5 LOW button 6 Q control 7 FREQUENCY 6 9 trol GAIN control Control Surface 9 SCENE MEMORY Section SCENE MEMORY STORE A RECALL 1 STORE button 2 Scene Up A Down V buttons 3 RECALL button USER DEFINED KEYS Section USER DEFINED KEYS 1 168 buttons Data Entry Section 1 Parameter wheel 2 ENTER button 3 DEC amp INC buttons 4 Left Right Up Down lt 4 gt 1 LY 1 cur sor buttons SOLO Section 1 SOLO indicator ae 2 CLEAR button aO 01 V96i Reference Manual J
329. utton then press the F3 button to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page then select the desired Aux Out 1 8 by using the corresponding SEL but tons DYHAHICS Initial Data 5111 8 2 113 2114 HUz1 Rusi EDIT prm 3 THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK S BdB 2 5 1 D ms RELEASE OUT GAIN 22 Ome i B BdB 2 The parameters on this page and procedure for them are the same as for Input Channels see page 20 EQ settings To set the EQ for Aux Out 1 8 press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F1 button to display the EQ EQ Edit page then use the SEL buttons to select Aux Out 1 8 Initial Dota Fe STI2 STIS STIA EDIT ERE LIBRARY ss IH ATT OUT ATT The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 21 Viewing Aux Out Settings You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the cur rently selected Aux Out on the View Parameter and Fader pages Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View Parameter page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired Aux Out 1 8 then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F1 button UIEH Initial Data 8 2 5113 2114 HUz1 Rhusi EDIT EXE pr HSERT i hores s NUM Lok L HMID HIGH THRES RATIO L SHELF 229
330. wheel INC DEC buttons or ENTER button to set the param eters INPUT OUTPUT FADER MASTER When this check box is checked you can set the master levels for the Fader groups The resultant Channel level equals the corresponding Channel fader level plus the Group Master level ALL NOMINAL This button resets the master levels for all Fader groups to nominal ON OFF This turns each Input Fader group on or off This func tion works like a VCA mute on an analog mixing console Faders These faders adjust the master levels of the Fader groups Fader knobs are highlighted when faders are set to 0 0 dB Press the ENTER button to set the currently selected fader to 0 0 You can also control the parameters from the channel strips on the control surface as described below by using the User Assignable Layer of the Remote Layers See page 110 for information on the User Assignable Layer SEL buttons These buttons move the cursor on the In Master page or Out Master page SOLO buttons These buttons turn the Solo function of each Fader group on and off You can monitor all the channels in each Fader group Channel Faders The channel faders enable you to set the master level for each Fader group 01V96i Reference Manual bunjur 9 sjauueyD 62 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters Using Mute Group Master In addition to the Mute Group function that links the o
331. will be received regardless of the channel When a message is received a Scene Memory will be recalled accord Cn ing to the settings of the Program Change Table Transmission If Program Change TX is ON this message is transmitted according to the set tings of the Program Change Table on the Tx CH channel when a scene memory is recalled If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted Transmission to Studio Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match Parameter Changes will always be used 1100nnnn Cn Program change Onnnnnnn nn Program number 0 127 STATUS DATA 2 5 TIMING CLOCK Reception It is used to control effects This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter F8 note STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2 6 ACTIVE SENSING Reception Once this message has been received the failure to receive any message for an FE interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized such as by clearing the Running Status STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing 2 7 SYSTEM RESET Reception When this message is received MIDI communications will be cleared e g by FF clearing the Running Status STATUS 11111111 FF System reset 2 8 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 2 8 1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL MMC These m
332. wo channels regardless of whether they are paired 9 PATTERN When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link func tion the seven patterns selectable here determine how the linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and the INC DEC buttons 01V96i Reference Manual Surround Panning 57 3 Select one of seven trajectory patterns by fs The sound image moves while tracing circle turning on the corresponding trajectory pat oval With this pattern you can also fine tune the tern button radius and shape of the circle or oval using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET I and OFFSET parameters The following patterns are available 144 tF48 832 4 24 24 824 Reo 40 52 40 4 If necessary fine tune the trajectory by edit ing the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameter values d To move the sound image move the cursor to anywhere outside the parameter boxes then rotate the Parameter wheel Em 36 F40 R40 4856 The sound image of selected channel moves along selected trajectory pattern The sound image moves from front left to rear right With this pattern you can also fine tune Tip You can also adjust the front and rear or left and right the trajectory by using the WIDTH DEPTH movement the trajectory pattern and other parameters from OF
333. x rx Effect library amp Request H tx rx Channel library amp Request R tx rx Input patch library amp Request O tx rx Output patch library amp Request N tx rx Plug in Effect Card Data amp Request 1 4 2 2 PARAMTER CHANGE Command rx tx function FO 43 1n 3E OD F7 RARAMETER rx tx 01V96i specific parameter change CHANGE FO 43 3n 3E OD F7 PARAMETER rx tx O1V96i specific parameter change REQUEST FO 43 1n 7F FZ PARAMETER rx tx General purpose digital mixer CHANGE parameter change FO 43 3n 7F FZ PARAMETER rx tx General purpose digital mixer REQUEST parameter request MIDI Data Format 173 The following data types of parameter change are used by 01V96i Type HEX tx rx function 1 01 tx rx Edit buffer 2 02 tx rx Patch data 3 03 tx rx Setup data 4 04 tx rx Backup data 16 10 tx rx Function recall store title clear 17 11 rx Function pair copy 18 12 rx Function effect 19 13 tx rx Sort table 20 14 tx rx Function attribute link 32 20 rx Key remote 33 21 tx rx Remote meter 34 22 tx rx Remote time counter tx indicates that the data can be transmitted from the 01V96i and rx indicates that the data can be received by the 01V96i 2 Format Details 2 1 NOTE OFF 8n Reception If OTHER ECHO is ON these message are echoed from MIDI OUT If the Rx CH matches these messages
334. yer See Owner s Manual for more information on this function B Machine Control By using MIDI Machine Control commands and the DIO Setup Machine page you can control an external recording machine that is connected to the 01V96i MIDI port USB port or optional MY16 mLAN card installed in the slot Tip control external devices from the 01V96i you can also use the User Defined buttons Refer to Other Functions on page 109 for more information Pro Tools Remote Layer The 01V96i features Remote Layer target especially designed for controlling Pro Tools Connections and Configuring Pro Tools Follow the steps below to connect the 01V96i to your com puter via the USB port so that you can control Pro Tools from the 01V96i Note You cannot control Pro Tools via MIDI connections Be sure to connect your computer via the USB or an optional MYI6 mLAN card installed in the 01V96i slot Configuring Windows Computers 1 Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver from the following URL http www yamahaproaudio com 2 Install the driver in your computer as described in the installation guide included in the downloaded file 3 Connect the 01V96i TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your PC using a USB cable 4 Make the necessary settings in Pro Tools Refer to the Pro Tools Owner s Manual for more informa tion about Pro Tools settings 01 V96i Reference Manual 84 R

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

説明書 - イーグルジャパン  Bedienungsanleitung - CONRAD Produktinfo.  KW Monitor Data Collection Software Operation Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file